Graco 4511 E STUDIO3511_4511_SH_EN_Ver06 User Manual To The 8a88f8cb 6d28 484b 8fc4 8d7006d74f4f
User Manual: Graco 4511 to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 552
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS e-STUDIO3511/4511 File No. SHE030002G0 R03042133500-TTEC Ver07_2005-07 © 2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO3511/4511 The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1. Transportation/Installation • When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to use the positions as indicated below. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 112kg (246 lb.), therefore pay full attention when handling it. • Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment. • Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110/13.2A, 115V or 127V/12A, 220V-240V or 240V/ 8A) for its power source. • The equipment must be grounded for safety. Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe. • Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. • Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. • To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) in the rear. • The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. 2. Service of Machines • Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service. • Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the damp heater and their periphery. • Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller, developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. • Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc. • Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. • When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation. • Use suitable measuring instruments and tools. • Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing. - Avoid direct exposure to the beam. - Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam. - Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective. • Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area. 3. Main Service Parts for Safety • The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made their functions out, they may burn down, for instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation. 4. Cautionary Labels • During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment. 5. Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials, Used batteries and RAM-ICs • Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, consumable parts, packing materials, used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules. 6. When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places. 7. Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. 8. Precautions Against Static Electricity • The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity. Caution : Dispose of used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries according to this manual. Attention : Se débarrasser de batteries et RAM-ICs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel. Vorsicht : Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und RAM-ICs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch. CONTENTS 1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES .......................................... 1-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 1-1 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Options ............................................................................................................................... 1-6 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-6 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-7 2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1 2.1 Error Code List ................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Jam ...................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Service call .......................................................................................................... 2-6 2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function .......................................................... 2-11 2.1.4 Printer function error .......................................................................................... 2-19 2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ....................................................................................................... 2-21 2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) ................................................................................ 2-23 2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) .............................................................................. 2-28 2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) .......................................................................... 2-31 2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) ........................................................................................ 2-32 2.2.5 Setting mode (08) .............................................................................................. 2-76 2.2.6 Pixel counter .................................................................................................... 2-154 2.2.7 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) ...................... 2-165 3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment) ................................................................. 3-1 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ................................................................................ 3-2 Performing Image Quality Control ...................................................................................... 3-5 Image Dimensional Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-6 3.4.1 General description .............................................................................................. 3-6 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ............................................................. 3-8 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment .................................................................................. 3-10 3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment ............................................................................... 3-15 3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) ................................................................. 3-21 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ........................................................................... 3-21 3.5.2 Density adjustment ............................................................................................ 3-22 3.5.3 Color balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-24 3.5.4 Gamma balance adjustment .............................................................................. 3-25 3.5.5 Offsetting adjustment for background processing .............................................. 3-26 3.5.6 Judgment threshold for ACS .............................................................................. 3-27 3.5.7 Sharpness adjustment ....................................................................................... 3-27 3.5.8 Setting range correction ..................................................................................... 3-28 3.5.9 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ............................... 3-29 3.5.10 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ....................................................................... 3-29 3.5.11 Adaptation to highlighter .................................................................................... 3-30 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC i 04/10 e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting ........................................................................... 3-30 3.5.13 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type ............................................. 3-31 3.5.14 Maximum text density adjustment ...................................................................... 3-31 3.5.15 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment .......................................................... 3-32 3.5.16 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode ................................ 3-32 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) .................................................................. 3-33 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ........................................................................... 3-33 3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode) ........................................................ 3-34 3.6.3 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode) ............................................................ 3-35 3.6.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ....................................................................... 3-36 3.6.5 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode ............................................................ 3-36 3.6.6 Dot size adjustment in black printing ................................................................. 3-37 3.6.7 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type ............................................. 3-37 3.6.8 Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing .................................... 3-37 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ............................................................... 3-38 3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment .............................................................................. 3-38 3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode) ...................................................................... 3-39 3.7.3 Background adjustment (Gray Scale Mode) ...................................................... 3-40 3.7.4 Background adjustment (Color Mode) ............................................................... 3-40 3.7.5 Judgment threshold for ACS .............................................................................. 3-41 3.7.6 Sharpness adjustment ....................................................................................... 3-41 3.7.7 Setting range correction ..................................................................................... 3-42 3.7.8 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ............................... 3-42 3.7.9 Fine adjustment of black density ........................................................................ 3-43 3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection ..................................................................... 3-43 3.7.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black) ................................... 3-44 3.7.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color) .................................... 3-44 High-Voltage Transformer Setting .................................................................................... 3-45 3.8.1 General description ............................................................................................ 3-45 3.8.2 Setting at the replacement of high-voltage transformer ..................................... 3-45 Adjustment of the Scanner Section .................................................................................. 3-46 3.9.1 Carriages ........................................................................................................... 3-46 3.9.2 Lens unit ............................................................................................................ 3-50 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ........................................................................ 3-52 3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .......................................... 3-52 Adjustment of the Developer Unit .................................................................................... 3-53 3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit) ...................................................... 3-53 3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit) ....................................................... 3-54 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015) ................................................................................ 3-56 3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF position ............................................................................. 3-56 3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF height ............................................................................... 3-60 3.12.3 Adjustment of skew ............................................................................................ 3-61 3.12.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM ........................ 3-62 3.12.5 Adjustment of aligning ........................................................................................ 3-63 3.12.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing .................................................................... 3-64 e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS ii 04/10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.12.7 Adjustment of reverse solenoid .......................................................................... 3-65 3.12.8 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch ..................................................... 3-67 3.12.9 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor .................................................... 3-68 3.12.10 Adjustment of tray volume ................................................................................. 3-69 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022) .............................................................................. 3-70 3.13.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width ....................................................................... 3-70 3.13.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ............................................................. 3-72 3.13.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ............................................................. 3-73 3.13.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ................................... 3-74 3.13.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate ................................................ 3-76 3.13.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle .................................................................... 3-77 3.13.7 DIP switch functions ........................................................................................... 3-79 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024) ..................................................................... 3-81 3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit) ................................................. 3-81 3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit) ....................................................... 3-82 3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) ........................................... 3-84 3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) ...................... 3-87 3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) .......................................................... 3-87 3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ...................................... 3-88 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) ................................................................................... 3-89 Adjustment of Transfer Belt Deviation .............................................................................. 3-91 3.16.1 Outline ............................................................................................................... 3-91 3.16.2 Transfer belt deviation ....................................................................................... 3-91 3.16.3 Adjustment procedure ........................................................................................ 3-92 4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) ............................................................................ 4-1 4.1 PM Support Mode .............................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.1 General description .............................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen ............................................................. 4-1 4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ........................................................................... 4-6 4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure ............................................................................ 4-7 4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling ....................................................................................... 4-7 4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist ..................................................................................... 4-8 4.5 PM KIT ............................................................................................................................. 4-23 4.6 Jig List .............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.7 Grease List ....................................................................................................................... 4-24 4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................ 4-25 4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ........................................................ 4-25 4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum .............................................. 4-26 4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade .......................................................... 4-27 4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaner brush ......................................................................... 4-27 4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt ..................................................................................... 4-27 4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller .................................... 4-27 4.8.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller .................................... 4-28 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC iii 05/03 e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS 5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1 5. Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ............................................................... 5-1 5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) .............................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................. 5-2 5.1.3 Paper transport jam ............................................................................................. 5-8 5.1.4 Other paper jam ................................................................................................. 5-16 5.1.5 Cover open jam ................................................................................................. 5-19 5.1.6 RADF jam .......................................................................................................... 5-23 5.1.7 Finisher jam ....................................................................................................... 5-28 5.1.8 Drive system related service call ....................................................................... 5-41 5.1.9 Paper feeding system related service call ......................................................... 5-42 5.1.10 Scanning system related service call ................................................................. 5-46 5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call ............................................................................ 5-47 5.1.12 Communication related service call ................................................................... 5-50 5.1.13 RADF related service call .................................................................................. 5-51 5.1.14 Circuit related service call .................................................................................. 5-52 5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call ................................................................. 5-55 5.1.16 Finisher related service call ............................................................................... 5-56 5.1.17 Image control related service call ...................................................................... 5-70 5.1.18 Copy process related service call ...................................................................... 5-74 5.1.19 Toner density control related service call ........................................................... 5-78 5.1.20 Other service call ............................................................................................... 5-82 5.1.21 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function .......................................................... 5-83 5.2 Troubleshooting of Image .............................................................................................. 5-100 5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................ 5-137 5.3.1 Replacing HDD ................................................................................................ 5-137 5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ....................................................................................... 5-139 5.3.3 Replacing SLG board ...................................................................................... 5-141 5.3.4 NVRAM replacing and clearing ........................................................................ 5-141 6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ................................................................................................ 6-1 6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig ............................................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ......................................................................... 6-4 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) ....................................................................... 6-10 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ........................... 6-20 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320 ............................................................................................... 6-21 6.2 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) ................................................. 6-35 6.3 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device .................................................................. 6-47Assist Mode ......................................................................................................... 6-61 7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................. 7-1 7.1 Output Channel .................................................................................................................. 7-1 7.2 Fuse ................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit ................................................................................... 7-4 e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS iv 04/10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 8. REMOTE SERVICE ....................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Auto Supply Order.............................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.2 Setting Item .......................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.3 Setting procedure ................................................................................................ 8-4 8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ........................................................................................... 8-12 8.2 Service Notification .......................................................................................................... 8-14 8.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................... 8-14 8.2.2 Setting ................................................................................................................ 8-14 8.2.2.1 Preparation ............................................................................................ 8-14 8.2.2.2 Setting procedure ................................................................................... 8-15 8.2.3 Items to be notified ............................................................................................. 8-19 9. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................. 9-1 9.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2 DC Wire Harness ..................................................................................................... Appendix 9.3 Connector Table ....................................................................................................... Appendix November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC v e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS vi November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 1. SPECIFICATIONS/ ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/ SUPPLIES 2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 3. ADJUSTMENT 4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 5. TROUBLESHOOTING 6. FIRMWARE UPDATING 7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT 8. REMOTE SERVICE 9. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 1.1 Specifications Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO4511 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO3511 and e-STUDIO4511. • Copy process • Type Indirect electrophotographic process (dry) Desktop type (Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) or optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.) • Original table Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals) • Accepted originals Sheet, book and 3-dimentional object For single-sided originals – 50-127 g/m2 (13-34 lb. Bond) For double-sided originals – 50-105 g/m2 (13-28 lb. Bond) None of the carbon, bonded nor stapled sheet original is acceptable when using the optional Reversing Automatic Document Feeder. Maximum size: A3/LD • Copy speed (Copies/min.) e-STUDIO3511 PFP LCF 35 (11) Bypass feed (Size specified) 35 (11) 35 (11) 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 28 ( 5 ) 28 ( 5 ) – 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 ) – Paper supply Paper size Drawer A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, LT-R, ST-R B4, LG A3, LD – e-STUDIO4511 B4, LG A3, LD * 45 (11) 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 32 ( 5 ) 32 ( 5 ) – 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 ) – A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, * LCF Drawer A5-R, LT-R, ST-R * * PFP 45 (11) Bypass feed (Size specified) 45 (11) Paper supply Paper size – “–” means “Not acceptable”. The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side, continuous copying. When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the following conditions: • Original/Mode: Single-sided original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected. /Plain paper. • Number of sheets: 35[45] or more at the black mode and 11 or more at the color mode. • Reproduction ratio: 100% The values in ( ) are available when printed at color mode. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 1-1 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS * System copy speed Sec. Copy mode e-STUDIO3511 e-STUDIO4511 Single-sided originals 1 set 22.9 ↓ Single-sided copies 3 sets 5 sets 60.9 (181.8) 94.8 (292.2) 49.9 (181.8) 76.3 (292.2) Single-sided originals ↓ 1 set 3 sets 31.3 (95.1) 70.7 (201.8) 30.3 (95.1) 71.9 (201.8) Double-sided copies Double-sided originals 5 sets 1 set 110.1 (311.2) 59.6 (149.6) 101.5 (311.2) 59.5 (149.6) ↓ Double-sided copies 3 sets 5 sets 138.7 (366.6) 217.3 (584.6) 130.4 (366.6) 201.5 (584.6) Double-sided originals ↓ 1 set 3 sets 51.2 (124.6) 120.8 (346.5) 51.5 (124.6) 105.7 (346.5) Single-sided copies 5 sets 188.7 (565.7) 158.5 (565.7) - (70.3) 19.8 (70.3) The system copy speed is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected. - The period of time from pressing [START] to displaying "READY" is the actually measured value. - Setting: Automatic exposure OFF, APS/AMS OFF, Text/Photo Mode, feeding from the upper drawer and Sort Mode. - The finisher with the saddle stitcher and hole punch unit are not installed. - The values in ( ) are the speeds at the color modes. • Copy paper Drawer ADU PFP LCF Size A3 to A5-R LD to ST-R, 13" LG, 8.5" SQ Weight 64 to 105 g/m2 17 to 28 lb. Bond Special paper - A4, LT Bypass copy Remarks A3 to A6-R, LD to ST-R, 13" LG, 8.5" SQ, 305 x 457 mm (12" x 18") (Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.) 64 to 209 g/m2,17 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Index (Continuous feeding) 64 to 209 g/m2, 17 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Index (Single paper feeding) Special paper recommended by Labels, OHP film (thickness: 80 µm or thicker) Toshiba Tec • First copy time ................... Approx. 6.8 sec. or less (black), approx. 16.2 sec. or less (color) (A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually) • Warming-up time ............... Approx. 40 seconds (Stand-alone, temperature: 20°C) • Multiple copying ................ Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS 1-2 04/10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC • Reproduction ratio ............. Actual ratio: 100±0.5% Zooming: 25 - 400% in increments of 1% (25 - 200% when using RADF) • Resolution/Gradation ........ Read: 600 dpi Write: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (black copy) Equivalent to 600 dpi x 600 dpi (color copy) • Eliminated portion ............. Leading edge : 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (black copy) Leading edge : 5.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (color copy) Leading/trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (black/color print) • Paper feeding .................... Drawers in the equipment – 2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) PFP – Option (1 or 2 drawers: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) LCF – Option (stack height 137.5 mm x 2, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) Bypass feed – Stack height 11 mm, equivalent to 100 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond) • Capacity of originals in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (Option) ................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: 100 sheets/80 g/m2 (Stack height 16mm or less) • Automatic duplexing unit ... Stackless/switchback type • Toner supply ...................... Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method • Density control .................. Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps • Weight ............................... Approx. 112 kg (246.9 lb.) • Power requirements .......... AC 110V/13.2A, AC 115V or 127V/15A, 220–240V or 240V/8A (50/60 Hz) * The acceptable value of each voltage is ±10%. • Power consumption .......... 1.5 kW or less (100V series), 1.7 kW or less (200V series) * The electric power is supplied to the reversing automatic document feeder, finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment. • Total counter ..................... Electronic counter November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 1-3 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS • Dimensions of the equipment .......... See the figure below (W660 x D718 x H739 mm) * When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees. 718 739 45° 66 0 Fig. 1-101 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS 1-4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 1.2 Accessories Unpacking/Setup instruction 1 set Operator’s manual 4 pcs. (except for MJD) Operator's manual pocket 1 pc. Power cable 1 pc. Warranty sheet 1 pc. (for NAD) Setup report 1 set (for NAD and MJD) Customer satisfaction card 1 pc. (for MJD) PM sticker 1 pc. (for MJD) Drum (installed inside of the equipment) 1 pc. Control panel stopper 1 pc. Lever 1 pc. Color developer holder 6 pcs. Rubber plug 4 pcs. Blind seal (small / large) 3 pcs. / 1pc. CD-ROM 4 pcs. Developer material (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. each (for TWD) Screw M3 x 8 / M4 x 8 1 pc. / 1pc. * Machine version NAD: North America MJD: Europe AUD: Australia ASD: Asia TWD: Taiwan SAD: Saudi Arabia JPD: Japan November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 1-5 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS 1.3 Options Platen cover KA-3511PC Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3015 Drawer module MY-1021 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012 A4/LT Finisher (Hanging type) MJ-1022 Finisher (Console type) MJ-1023, MJ-1024 (with saddle stitcher) Hole punch unit MJ-6004 N/E/F/S Staple cartridge STAPLE-1600 (for hanging type) STAPLE-2000 (for console type) STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher) Bridge kit KN-3511 Key copy counter, key copy counter socket MU-8, MU-10 Work table KK-3511 Damp heater kit MF-3511 FAX board GD-1150 FAX board 2nd line GD-1160 Expansion memory GC-1180 Wireless LAN adapter GN-1010 PCI slot GO-1030 Scrambler board GP-1030 Notes: 1. The bridge kit (KN-3511) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or MJ-1024). 2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S). 3. The PCI slot (GO-1030) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030). 1.4 Supplies Drum PS-OD3511 Toner bag PS-TB3511 Toner cartridge (K) PS-ZT3511 *K, PS-ZT3511K Toner cartridge (Y) PS-ZT3511 *Y, PS-ZT3511Y Toner cartridge (M) PS-ZT3511 *M, PS-ZT3511M Toner cartridge (C) PS-ZT3511 *C, PS-ZT3511C Marked * : E, D, C and T e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS 1-6 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 1-7 Staple cartridge STAPLE-600 MJ-1024 Finisher MJ-1023 Finisher Staple cartridge STAPLE-2000 Staple cartridge STAPLE-1600 MJ-1022 Finisher Hole punch unit MJ-6004N/E/F/S MY-1021 Drawer module Scrambler board GP-1030 PCI slot GO-1030 Wireless LAN adapter GN-1010 Expansion memory GC-1180 FAX board 2nd line GD-1160 FAX board GD-1150 Bridge kit KN-3511 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3015 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011 Damp heater MF-3511 MU8, MU-10 Key copy counter Work table KK-3511 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012A4/LT KA-3511PC Platen cover 1.5 System List Fig. 1-501 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS 1-8 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2.1 Error Code List One of the following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen while pressing the [CLEAR] button and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALL SERVICE” symbol is blinking. 2.1.1 Jam Error code E010 E011 Paper exit jam Jam not reaching the exit sensor : The paper which has passed Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.1 Other paper jam through the fuser unit does not reach the exit sensor. Paper jam caused by clinging to the transfer belt: The paper Ch. 5.1.4 Classification Contents after the 2nd transfer is clinging to the transfer belt and entering under the receiving tray. E020 Paper exit jam E030 Other paper jam Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this Ch. 5.1.1 sensor. Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the paper transport Ch. 5.1.4 E090 path when power is turned ON. HDD abnormality causes jam: Image data to be printed cannot Ch. 5.1.4 E110 be prepared. ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): Ch. 5.1.2 Paper misfeeding The paper which has passed through ADU does not reach the registration sensor during duplex printing. E120 Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray does not reach the registration sensor. Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the upper drawer E130 Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.2 feed sensor): The paper fed from the upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor. E140 Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP E150 Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.2 upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. E160 PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP lower E190 E200 Paper transport jam Ch. 5.1.2 drawer does not reach the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor): The Ch. 5.1.2 paper fed from the LCF does not reach the LCF feed sensor. Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration Ch. 5.1.3 sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2-1 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Error code E210 Classification Contents Paper transport Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration jam sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. E220 Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.3 Ch. 5.1.3 drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. E300 PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper E310 Ch. 5.1.3 Ch. 5.1.3 drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower E320 Ch. 5.1.3 drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the E330 Ch. 5.1.3 registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. E340 PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower E350 Ch. 5.1.3 Ch. 5.1.3 drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP E360 Ch. 5.1.3 upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): E3C0 Ch. 5.1.3 The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. E3D0 LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed E3E0 Ch. 5.1.3 Ch. 5.1.3 sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the LCF feed sensor. E400 E410 Cover open jam Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover has opened during printing. Ch. 5.1.5 Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened during printing. Ch. 5.1.5 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2-2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Error code E420 PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has opened Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.5 during printing. ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during printing. Ch. 5.1.5 Classification Cover open jam E430 Contents E440 Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened during printing. Ch. 5.1.5 E450 LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has opened during printing. Ch. 5.1.5 E480 Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened during printing. Ch. 5.1.5 Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU entrance sensor. Ch. 5.1.3 Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor after it is switchbacked in Ch. 5.1.3 E510 Paper transport jam (ADU section) E520 E550 Other paper jam the exit section. Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The paper is Ch. 5.1.4 remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding). E711 E712 E713 RADF jam Jam not reaching the original length sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the original length sensor. Jam not reaching the registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the registration sensor. Stop jam at the original length sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original length sensor after its leading Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6 E714 edge has reached this sensor. Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is received even no Ch. 5.1.6 E721 original exists on the original feeding tray. Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original does not reach Ch. 5.1.6 the read sensor after it has passed the registration sensor (when scanning obverse side) or the reverse sensor (when E722 scanning reverse side). Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning): The original Ch. 5.1.6 which passed the read sensor does not reach the exit sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to exit section. E723 Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the Ch. 5.1.6 reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to reverse section. E724 E725 Stop jam at the registration sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the registration sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the original Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6 does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. E726 Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF receives the transport/ exit reception signal from the equipment when no original is at the Ch. 5.1.6 exposure waiting position. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2-3 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Error code E731 Classification RADF jam Contents Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the original Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.6 does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. E741 Stop jam at the reverse sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the reverse sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during reverse feeding): E742 Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6 The leading edge of the original does not reach the reverse sensor when original is fed from the reverse section. E743 Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during reverse feeding): The original does not reach the exit sensor after it has passed the Ch. 5.1.6 reverse sensor when the original is exited from the reverse section. E860 E870 E910 Jam access cover open: The jam access cover has opened during RADF operation. Finisher jam (Bridge unit) E920 RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF operation. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The paper does not Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.7 (1) reach the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The trailing edge Ch. 5.1.7 (1) of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after its leading edge has reached the sensor. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trailing edge of E930 Ch. 5.1.7 (1) the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport sensor 1. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trailing edge Ch. 5.1.7 (1) E940 of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport E9F0 Finisher jam sensor 2. Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly. EA10 (Punch unit) Finisher jam [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has passed the bridge Ch. 5.1.7 (2) (Finisher section) unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Paper transport stop jam: EA20 Ch. 5.1.7 (4) Ch. 5.1.7 (2) (1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor. EA30 [MJ-1023/1024] Power-ON jam: Ch. 5.1.7 (2) (1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024] e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2-4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Error code EA40 Classification Contents Finisher jam Door open jam: (Finisher section) (1) The finisher has been released from the equipment during printing. [MJ-1022] Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.7 (2) (2) The upper/front cover of the finisher section or the upper/ front door of the puncher section has opened during EA50 printing. [MJ-1023/1024] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. EA60 [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper earlier than Ch. 5.1.7 (2) EA70 a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of paper on the Ch. 5.1.7 (2) Ch. 5.1.7 (3) Ch. 5.1.7 (2) EA80 Finisher jam intermediary process tray to the stack tray. [MJ-1022] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. [MJ-1024] EA90 (Saddle stitcher section) Door open jam: The delivery cover or inlet cover has opened dur- Ch. 5.1.7 (3) ing printing [MJ-1024]. EAA0 Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1024] Transport stop jam: The paper which passed through the inlet EAB0 Ch. 5.1.7 (3) Ch. 5.1.7 (3) sensor does not reach or pass No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024] EAC0 Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1024] EAD0 Other paper jam EAE0 Finisher jam Print end command time-out jam: The printing has not finished normally because of the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board at the end of printing. Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been interrupted Ch. 5.1.7 (3) Ch. 5.1.4 Ch. 5.1.7 (5) because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher when the paper is transported from the equipment EAF0 Finisher jam to the finisher. Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which passed through Ch. 5.1.7 (2) EB30 (Finisher section) Finisher jam the delivery roller on the intermediary process tray. [MJ-1022] Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges that the paper Ch. 5.1.7 (5) transport to the finisher is disabled because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher at the start of printing. EB50 EB60 Paper transport jam Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper. Ch. 5.1.3 Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper Ch. 5.1.3 (redetection after no jam is detected at [EB50]). November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2-5 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2.1.2 Service call Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not rotating normally. Developer motor abnormality: The developer motor is not Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.8 Ch. 5.1.8 rotating normally. Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is not rotating Ch. 5.1.8 Paper feeding normally. PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating normally. Ch. 5.1.9 system related service call (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP) Error code Classification C010 C020 Drive system related service call C030 C040 C130 Contents Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the upper drawer tray is not moving normally. Ch. 5.1.9 (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the upper drawer) C140 Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the Ch. 5.1.9 case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the lower drawer) C150 PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP upper drawer tray is not moving Ch. 5.1.9 normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP upper drawer) C160 PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP lower drawer tray is not moving Ch. 5.1.9 normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP lower drawer) C180 LCF tray motor abnormality: The LCF tray motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end fence motor is C1A0 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 not rotating or the LCF end fence is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) C1B0 C260 LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any Scanning system related service call C270 Ch. 5.1.9 drawer except the LCF) Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp (white refer- Ch. 5.1.10 ence) is not detected when power is turned ON. Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a specified Ch. 5.1.10 period of time: The carriage does not shift from its home position in a specified time. C280 C360 Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a specified period of time: The carriage does not reach to its home position Copy process in a specified period of time. Charger cleaner motor abnormality: Charger cleaner motor is related service call not rotating or wire cleaner is not moving normally. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2-6 Ch. 5.1.10 Ch. 5.1.18 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Error code Classification Contents C410 Fuser unit related Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON: Abnormality of service call the thermistor is detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified period of time after power is turned ON. Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment: Abnormality C430 Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.11 Ch. 5.1.11 of the thermistor is detected after a specified period of time has passed from power-ON (including ready time or energy saving mode). Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment: The temperature C440 Ch. 5.1.11 of the fuser roller has exceeded the range of control (in this case, the main switch turns OFF automatically) or does not even reach C450 the range. Thermistor abnormality during printing: Abnormality of the ther- Ch. 5.1.11 C470 mistor is detected during printing. IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality: The AC input is Ch. 5.1.11 not applied to the IH control circuit normally, or the input voltage is too high/low. C480 Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT rises abnormally. Ch. 5.1.11 C490 IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/shorted. Ch. 5.1.11 Optional communication related RADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred between the RADF and the scanner. Ch. 5.1.12 C570 C580 service call Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board Communication error between IPC board and finisher Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.12 C730 RADF related service call EEPROM initialization error: EEPROM is not initialized normally when performing the code 05-356. Ch. 5.1.13 C810 C820 Fan motor abnormality: The fan motor is not rotating normally. Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor cannot be Ch. 5.1.13 Ch. 5.1.13 C830 adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356. Original length sensor adjustment error: The original length Ch. 5.1.13 C550 (C780) sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356. C900 C940 Circuit related service call Connection error between SYS board and LGC board Engine-CPU abnormality Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 C950 C960 LGC board memory abnormality Connection error between LGC board and DRV board, ID Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 C970 Process related abnormality High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of the main Ch. 5.1.18 C9E0 service call Circuit related charger is detected. Connection error between SLG board and SYS board, ID Ch. 5.1.14 CA10 service call Laser optical unit abnormality Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor is not Ch. 5.1.15 CA20 related service call rotating normally. H-Sync detection error: H-Sync signal detection PC board Ch. 5.1.15 cannot detect laser beams. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2-7 05/05 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Error code CB20 CB30 Finisher related Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or delivery roller is Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.16 service call not rotating normally. [MJ-1022] Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor Ch. 5.1.16 Classification Contents is not rotating or delivery tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] CB40 Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. Ch. 5.1.16 CB50 [MJ-1023/1024] Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotating or stapler Ch. 5.1.16 CB60 is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Stapler shift motor abnormality: Stapler shift motor is not Ch. 5.1.16 CB80 rotating or staple unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Backup RAM data abnormality: Ch. 5.1.16 (1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024] (2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. CB90 [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper pushing plate Ch. 5.1.16 motor is not rotating or paper pushing plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] CBA0 Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.16 CBB0 Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.16 CBC0 Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.16 CBD0 Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.16 CBE0 Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.16 CBF0 Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper positioning plate is not Ch. 5.1.16 CC00 moving normally. [MJ-1024] Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide home position Ch. 5.1.16 sensor, paper pushing plate home position sensor or paper pushing plate top position sensor is disconnected. [MJ-1024] CC10 Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed, inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover switch is open. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.16 CC20 Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and Ch. 5.1.16 CC30 saddle stitcher controller board [MJ-1023/1024] Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack processing Ch. 5.1.16 motor is not rotating or the stack delivery belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] CC40 Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2-8 Ch. 5.1.16 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Error code CC50 CC60 CC80 Classification Contents Finisher related Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizontal registration service call motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment motor is not Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 rotating or front aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Front aligning plate motor abnormality: Front aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] CC90 CCA0 Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower stack tray lift Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 motor is not rotating or the lower stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] CCB0 Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Ch. 5.1.16 CCD0 Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Ch. 5.1.16 CCE0 Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper trailing edge assist is Ch. 5.1.16 CCF0 not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing motor is not Ch. 5.1.16 CE00 rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Communication error between finisher and punch unit: Commu- Ch. 5.1.16 nication error between finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] CE10 CE20 Image control Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The output value related service call of this sensor is out of a specified range when sensor light source is OFF. Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level): The output Ch. 5.1.17 Ch. 5.1.17 value of this sensor is out of a specified range when the image quality control test pattern is not formed. CE40 Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The test pattern is not formed normally. Ch. 5.1.17 CE50 Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range. Ch. 5.1.17 CE90 Drum thermistor abnormality: The output value of the drum thermistor is out of a specified range. Ch. 5.1.17 CEA0 Copy process Revolver home position detection abnormality: It cannot detect related service call that the revolver is at its home position. Ch. 5.1.18 CEB0 Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality: The black developer unit does not move up or down normally (lifting cam Ch. 5.1.18 does not operate normally). November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2-9 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Copy process 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality: The 2nd Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.18 related service call CEE0 transfer roller does not contact/release normally. Transfer belt position detection abnormality (normal speed): Ch. 5.1.18 CEE1 The home position of the transfer belt cannot be detected. Transfer belt position detection abnormality (when decelerating): Ch. 5.1.18 CEF0 Reference position of the transfer belt cannot be detected. Revolver motor abnormality: Revolver motor is not rotating or Ch. 5.1.18 CF20 Toner density revolver is not moving normally. Toner density detection voltage abnormality: The output value of Ch. 5.1.19 CF30 control related service call the color auto-toner sensor in printing is out of a specified range. Reference plate detection voltage abnormality: The output Ch. 5.1.19 Error code CEC0 Classification Contents value of the color auto-toner sensor against the reference plate is out of a specified range at the light amount correction during an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job has finished. Light amount correction voltage abnormality: The light amount CF40 Ch. 5.1.19 correction is not finished normally during an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job has finished, or the output value of the sensor is out of a specified range when the light amount correction has finished. CF50 Color auto-toner sensor abnormality: The connection of the color auto-toner sensor cannot be detected at the initialization, Ch. 5.1.19 or the output value of color auto-toner sensor when the revolver starts rotating for initialization is out of a specified range. F070 Communication related service call Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU Ch. 5.1.12 F090 F091 Circuit related service call SRAM abnormality on the SYS board NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 F092 F100 Other service call SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally. Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.20 F101 F102 HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected. HDD start error: HDD cannot become ‘Ready’ state. Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 F103 HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in the specified period of time. Ch. 5.1.20 F104 F105 HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of HDD. HDD other error Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 F106 F107 Point and Print partition damage /SHR partition damage Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 F108 F110 Communication /SHA partition damage Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.12 F111 F120 related service call Other service call Scanner response abnormality Database abnormality: Database is not operating normally. Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.20 F350 Circuit related service call SLG board abnormality Ch. 5.1.14 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function (1) Internet FAX related error 1C10 1C11 System access abnormality Insufficient memory Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C12 1C13 Message reception error Message transmission error Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C14 1C15 Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C20 1C21 System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C22 1C30 Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C31 1C32 File creation failure File deletion failure Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C33 1C40 File access failure Image conversion abnormality Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C60 1C61 HDD full failure during processing Address Book reading failure Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C62 1C63 Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C64 1C65 Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C66 1C67 Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C68 1C69 NIC access error SMTP server connection error Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C6A 1C6B HOST NAME error Terminal mail address error Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C6C 1C6D Destination mail address error System error Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C70 1C80 SMTP client OFF Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1C81 1C82 Onramp Gateway transmission failure Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) 1CC0 1CC1 Job canceling Power failure Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Error code Contents November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 11 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (2) RFC related error Error code 2500 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Syntax error, command unrecognized Contents HOST NAME error(RFC: 500) Destination mail address error Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (2) (RFC: 500) Terminal mail address error 2501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments (RFC: 500) HOST NAME error(RFC: 501) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 501) 2503 Bad sequence of commands Destination mail address error (RFC: 503) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) 2504 2550 Command parameter not implemented Mailbox unavailable HOST NAME error(RFC: 504) Destination mail address error Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) 2551 User not local (RFC: 550) Destination mail address error Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Insufficient system storage (RFC: 551) Terminal/Destination mail address error Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Mailbox name not allowed (RFC: 552) Destination mail address error Ch. 5.1.21 (2) 2552 2553 (RFC: 553) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 12 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (3) Electronic Filing related error Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (3) 2B10 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen There was no applicable job. 2B11 2B20 Job status failed. Failed to access file. JOB status abnormality File library function error Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) 2B30 2B31 Insufficient disk space. Failed to access Electronic Filing. Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition Status of specified Electronic Filing or Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Error code Contents No applicable job error in job control module folder is undefined or being created/ deleted 2B32 Failed to print Electronic Filing document. Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of client’s access (being edited, etc.). 2B50 2B51 Failed to process image. Failed to process print image. Image library error List library error Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) 2B71 2B80 Document(s) expire(s) in a few days Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing Documents expiring in a few days exist Hard disk space in /SHR partition is 2B90 nearly full. Insufficient Memory. nearly full (90%). Insufficient memory capacity Ch. 5.1.21 (3) 2BA0 2BB0 Invalid Box password specified. Job canceled Invalid Box password Job canceling Ch. 5.1.21 (3) - 2BB1 2BC0 Power failure occurred System fatal error. 2BC1 Failed to acquire resource. Power failure Fatal failure occurred System management module resource Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) 2BD0 Power failure occurred during e-Filing restoring. acquiring failure Power failure occurred during restoring Ch. 5.1.21 (3) 2BE0 2BF0 Failed to get machine parameter. Maximum number of page range is of Electronic Filing Machine parameter reading failure Ch.5.1.21 (3) Exceeding maximum number of pages Ch.5.1.21 (3) 2BF1 reached. Maximum number of document range is Ch.5.1.21 (3) 2BF2 reached. Maximum number of folder range is Exceeding maximum number of documents Exceeding maximum number of folders Ch.5.1.21 (3) - reached. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 13 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 (4) E-mail related error 2C10 2C11 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory System access abnormality Insufficient memory Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C12 2C13 Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Message reception error Message transmission error Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C14 2C15 Invalid parameter specified Message size exceeded limit or Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C20 maximum size Illegal Job status System management module access Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C21 Illegal Job status abnormality Job control module access abnormality Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C22 2C30 Illegal Job status Failed to create directory Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C31 2C32 Failed to create file Failed to delete file File creation failure File deletion failure Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C33 2C40 Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format File access failure Image conversion abnormality Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C60 Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. HDD full failure during processing Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C61 2C62 Failed to read AddressBook Not enough memory Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C63 2C64 Invalid Domain Address Invalid Domain Address 2C65 2C66 Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to connect to SMTP server Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C67 2C68 Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to send E-Mail message Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C69 2C6A Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message NIC access error SMTP server connection error Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C6B 2C6C Invalid address specified in From: field Invalid address specified in To: field HOST NAME error (No RFC error) Terminal mail address error Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Destination mail address error (No RFC error) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C6D NIC system error 2C70 2C80 SMTP service is not available Failed to process received E-mail job System error SMTP client OFF Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Ch. 5.1.21 (4) 2C81 Failed to process received Fax job 2CC0 2CC1 Job canceled Power failure occurred Process failure of FAX job received Job canceling Ch. 5.1.21 (4) - Power failure Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Error code Contents e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (5) File sharing related error Error code 2D10 2D11 2D12 2D13 2D14 2D15 2D20 2D21 2D22 2D30 2D31 2D32 2D33 2D40 2D60 2D61 2D62 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Illegal Job status Contents System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding document number System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality File library access abnormality Invalid parameter File server connection error Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Invalid network path Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Login failure Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed. HDD full failure during processing Ch. 5.1.21 (5) FTP service not available Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) 2D67 Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format Failed to copy file Invalid parameter specified Failed to connect to network destination. Check destination path Specified network path is invalid. Check destination path Logon to file server failed. Check username and password There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. FTP service is not available 2D68 File Sharing service is not available File sharing service not available 2DA0 Expired scan documents deleted from share folder. Expired Sent Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Expired Received Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Scanned documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Sent Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Received Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Failed to delete file. Failed to acquire resource. Job canceled Power failure occurred Periodical deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Manual deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. File deletion failure Resource acquiring failure Job canceling Power failure 2D63 2D64 2D65 2D66 2DA1 2DA2 2DA3 2DA4 2DA5 2DA6 2DA7 2DC0 2DC1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) 2 - 15 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (6) E-mail reception related error Error code 3A10 3A11 3A12 3A20 3A21 3A22 3A30 3A40 3A50 3A51 3A52 3A60 3A61 3A62 3A70 3A80 3A81 3A82 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Whole partial mails were not reached by timeout. Partial Mail Error has been detected in the received mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Receiving partial mail was aborted since the partial mail setting has been changed to Disable. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Contents E-mail MIME error Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) E-mail analysis error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Partial mail time-out error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Partial mail related error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Insufficient HDD capacity error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Warning of insufficient HDD capacity Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Warning of partial mail interruption Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Partial mail reception setting OFF Ch. 5.1.21 (6) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 16 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3B10 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Format Error has been detected in the 3B11 received mail. Format Error has been detected in the Error code Contents E-mail format error Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3B12 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be 3B20 transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in 3B21 the received mail. Content-Type Error has been detected in Content-Type error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3B22 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be 3B30 transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the 3B31 received mail. Charset Error has been detected in the Charset error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3B32 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be 3B40 transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the 3B41 received mail. Decode Error has been detected in the E-mail decode error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3B42 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be 3C10 transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in 3C11 the received mail. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in TIFF analysis error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3C12 3C13 Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) the received mail. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 17 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 3C20 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Tiff Compression Error has been 3C21 detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been Error code Contents TIFF compression error Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3C22 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be 3C30 transferred to the administrator. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected 3C31 in the received mail. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected TIFF resolution error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3C32 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not 3C40 be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected 3C41 in the received mail. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected TIFF paper size error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3C42 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not 3C50 be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been 3C51 detected in the received mail. Offramp Destination Error has been Offramp destination error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. 3C52 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. 3C60 Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. 3C61 Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail 3C62 Offramp security error has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 18 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3C70 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Power Failure has been occurred in Power failure error Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 3D10 Email receiving. SMTP Destination Error has been Destination address error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Error code Contents detected in the received mail. This mail was deleted. 3D20 Offramp Destination limitation Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp destination limitation error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 3D30 Fax Board Error has been occurred in the received mail. FAX board error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 3E10 POP3 Connection Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 server connection error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 3E20 POP3 Connection Timeout Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 server connection time-out error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 3E30 POP3 Login Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 login error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 3F00 3F10 File I/O Error has been occurred in this mail. The mail could not be received until File I/O error Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 3F20 3F30 File I/O is recovered. Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 3F40 Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 2.1.4 Printer function error Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen. Error code Contents Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 402F Page memory size error - 1200 dpi network print is performed by the equipment with 128 MB (standard) memory. 4031 HDD full during print - Large quantity image data by private print or invalid network print are saved in HDD. Ch. 5.1.21 (6) 4032 A221 Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed. Print job cancellation - Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from the Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) A222 print job screen. Print job power failure - The power of the equipment is turned OFF during print job Ch. 5.1.21 (6) (copy, list print, network print). November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 19 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 < > In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example EA10 03 07 26 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 Error code YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.) A B C D E F G H I J Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Unused 5: PFP lower drawer 6: Unused 7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5 A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unsed H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ K: A3-wide L: 305×457 mm M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase 3: Mirror image 2: Dual-page 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying 4: Unused 3: Edge erase & Dual-page K L Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission MMM Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M NNN Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N O Color mode 0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale 6: Unused 7: Image smoothing e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 20 04/09 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes Mode For start Contents For exit Display Control panel check mode [0]+[1]+ [POWER] All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the LCD pixels blink. [POWER] OFF/ON Test mode [0]+[3]+ [POWER] Checks the status of input/output signals. [POWER] OFF/ON 100% C A4 TEST MODE Test print mode [0]+[4]+ [POWER] Outputs the test patterns. [POWER] OFF/ON 100% P A4 TEST PRINT Adjustment mode [0]+[5]+ [POWER] Adjusts various items. [POWER] OFF/ON 100% A A4 TEST MODE Setting mode [0]+[8]+ [POWER] Sets various items. [POWER] OFF/ON 100% D TEST MODE List print mode [9]+[START]+ [POWER] Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and 08, PM support mode and pixel counter. [POWER] OFF/ON 100% UA A4 LIST PRINT PM support mode [6]+[START]+ [POWER] Clears each counter. [POWER] OFF/ON 100% K TEST MODE Firmware update mode [8]+[9]+ [POWER] Performs updating of the system firmware. [POWER] OFF/ON Note: To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously. • Control panel check mode (01): [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [0][1] [POWER] (LED lit/LCD blinking) [START] (Button check) [START] Notes: 1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking. 2. Button Check Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.) Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.) Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at powerON.) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 21 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE • Test mode (03): Refer to “2.2.1. Input check (test mode 03)” and “2.2.2. Output check (test mode 03)”. • Test print mode (04): Refer to “2.2.3. Test print mode (04)”. • Adjustment mode (05): Refer to “2.2.4. Adjustment mode (05)”. • Setting mode (08): Refer to “2.2.5. Setting mode (08)”. • List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code. (Code) [START] 101: Adjustment mode (05) 102: Setting mode (08) [9] [START] [POWER] [Digital keys] [START] Key in the first code to be printed [Digital keys] Key in the last code to be printed [START] List starts to be printed [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) (Code) 103: PM support mode 104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference) 105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference) 106: Error history • PM support mode (6S): [6][START] [POWER] [START] (Operation started) (Code) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) 2: PM Support Screen • Firmware update mode (89): Refer to “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING”. [POWER] ON Normal [0][1] Warming up Control panel check mode [0][3] Test mode [0][4] Test print mode [0][5] Adjustment mode [0][8] Setting mode [9][START] List print mode [6][START] PM support mode [8][9] Firmware update mode Ready [POWER] OFF *1 To user State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes *1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the equipment to the user. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 22 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and the digital keys in the test mode (03). [0][3] [POWER] [FAX] or [COPY] [START] [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit) [CLEAR] Note: Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode. [Example of display during input check] Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 23 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE [FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF ( [FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: OFF) Digital Button key [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H Condition with highlighted button Items to check Bypass unit connection ADU connection Not connected Not connected — LCF connection Not connected — — — LCF drawer detection switch PFP upper drawer detection switch — PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP connection PFP side cover open/close switch PFP upper drawer empty sensor PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor LCF tray bottom sensor LCF standby side paper misload detection sensor — — — — — Paper stock sensor at LCF feed side PFP lower drawer detection switch — PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) — PFP lower drawer empty sensor PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor LCF end fence home position sensor LCF end fence stop position sensor Empty sensor at LCF standby side LCF side cover open/close switch LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) LCF tray-up sensor LCF feed sensor Empty sensor at LCF feed side Lower drawer detection switch Upper drawer detection switch Lower drawer paper stock sensor Upper drawer paper stock sensor Lower drawer empty sensor Upper drawer empty sensor Lower drawer tray-up sensor Upper drawer tray-up sensor e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 24 Drawer not installed Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Not connected Cover opened No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at bottom position Properly loaded Paper present Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Abnormal rotation No paper Tray at upper limit position Fence home position Fence stop position No paper Cover closed Abnormal rotation Tray at upper limit position No paper No paper Drawer not installed Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper almost empty No paper No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at upper limit position November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Digital Button key A B C D [7] E F G H A B C D [8] E F G H A B C D [9] E F G H A B C D [0] E F Condition with highlighted button Items to check — — — — Side cover open/close switch Front cover opening/closing switch — Exit sensor Bypass feed paper width sensor 3 Bypass feed paper width sensor 2 Bypass feed paper width sensor 1 Bypass feed paper width sensor 0 Bypass sensor ADU opening/closing switch ADU exit sensor ADU entrance sensor — — — — — Key copy counter connection — Paper clinging detection sensor — — — — — — G — H — Cover opened Cover opened Paper present Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 No paper ADU opened Paper present Paper present Not connected No paper Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width). Bypass paper width sensor Paper width size 3 2 1 0 0 1 1 1 A3/LD 1 0 1 1 A4-R/LT-R 1 1 0 1 A5-R/ST-R 1 1 1 0 Card size 0 0 1 1 B4-R/LG 1 0 0 1 B5-R November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 25 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE [FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/[COPY] LED: OFF) Digital Button key A B C D [1] E F G [2] [3] [4] [5] H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H Items to check 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor Black developer contact timing detection sensor Black developer contact position detection sensor Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Developer motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Transport motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) 24V Power supply IPC board connection Color toner cartridge sensor Revolver home position sensor — — Toner bag full detection sensor Black auto-toner sensor connection — — — — — — — Lower drawer feed sensor Upper drawer feed sensor — — — — Bridge unit connection Color auto-toner sensor connection — — — — — — — RADF connection Platen sensor Carriage home position sensor e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 26 Condition with highlighted button Released Releasing movement Released position Abnormal rotation Abnormal rotation Abnormal rotation Abnormal rotation Power OFF Not connected Normally Home position Toner bag full Not connected No paper Paper present Not connected Not connected RADF connected Platen cover opened Home position November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Digital Button key A B C D [6] E F G H A B C D [7] E F G H A B C D [8] E F G H A B C D [9] E F G H A B C D [0] E F G H Condition with highlighted button Items to check — — — APS sensor (APS-R) APS sensor (APS-C) APS sensor (APS-3) APS sensor (APS-2) APS sensor (APS-1) RADF tray sensor RADF empty sensor RADF jam access cover switch RADF open/close sensor RADF exit sensor RADF reverse sensor RADF read sensor RADF registration sensor — — — — RADF original length sensor RADF original width sensor 1 RADF original width sensor 2 RADF original width sensor 3 Black toner cartridge switch — — Bypass feed sensor Registration sensor — — Transfer belt home position sensor Bridge unit transport sensor 2 Bridge unit cover open/close detection switch Bridge unit transport sensor 1 Bridge unit paper full detection sensor — Charger cleaner front position detection switch Charger cleaner rear position detection switch — No original No original No original No original No original Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Cartridge not installed No paper Paper present Home position Paper present Cover opened Paper present Paper not full Cleaner home position Cleaner rear position [FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: ON) Digital Items to check key [1] Temperature/humidity sensor [2] Temperature/humidity sensor [3] Drum thermistor November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Display on the touch panel Displays the temperature inside the equipment. (Unit: °C) Displays the humidity inside the equipment. (Unit: %RH) Displays the temperature near the drum surface. (Unit: °C) 2 - 27 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03. Procedure 1 [0][3] [POWER] (Code) ( [START] ) ( ) Operation ON Stop code ( [START] Operation OFF ) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit) Procedure 2 [0][3] [POWER] [START] (Code) ( Operation One direction ) ( [CLEAR] Test mode standby ) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit) Procedure 3 [0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START] ( ) Operation ON [START] ( Operation OFF ) [CLEAR] ( Test mode standby ) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) Procedure 4 [0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START] [POWER]OFF e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 28 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Code 101 102 103 108 109 110 112 115 116 118 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 218 222 225 226 228 232 235 241 242 243 248 249 252 261 264 265 267 268 271 278 Function Code Function Main motor ON (Operational without black 151 Code No.101 function OFF developer unit) Toner motor K (normal rotation) ON 152 Code No.102 function OFF Polygonal motor (600dpi) ON 153 Code No.103 function OFF Registration clutch ON 158 Code No.108 function OFF PFP motor ON 159 Code No.109 function OFF ADU motor ON 160 Code No.110 function OFF Developer motor ON (Operational with black 162 Code No.112 function OFF developer unit) Drum cleaning brush motor ON 165 Code No.115 function OFF Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON 166 Code No.116 function OFF Laser ON 168 Code No.118 function OFF Exit motor (normal rotation) ON 170 Code No.120 function OFF Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON 171 Code No.121 function OFF LCF motor ON 172 Code No.122 function OFF Transport motor ON 173 Code No.123 function OFF Toner motor K (reversal rotation) ON 174 Code No.124 function OFF Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid ON 175 Code No.125 function OFF (open) Color auto-toner sensor LED ON 176 Code No.126 function OFF Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Lower transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF Lower transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF LCF end fence reciprocating movement LCF end fence motor ON/OFF LCF feed clutch ON/OFF LCF transport clutch ON/OFF Key copy counter count up ADU clutch ON/OFF PFP transport clutch ON/OFF PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF Discharge LED ON/OFF IH board cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) Developer bias (Black) [+DC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Black) [-DC] ON/OFF Main charger ON/OFF Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position, speed can be changed by using ZOOM button) SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan ON (high/low speed) SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan OFF Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Procedure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 - 29 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Code 280 281 282 283 284 285 294 295 297 410 411 412 413 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 424 425 426 427 428 430 431 432 433 435 437 439 440 442 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 Function Procedure PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) RADF read motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF Power OFF mode (for 200V series) RADF fan motor ON/OFF Power supply cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Power supply cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed) Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed) IH board cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF Developer bias (Black) [AC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [+DC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [-DC1] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [AC] ON/OFF 1st transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF 1st transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF Drum cleaning blade bias ON/OFF Image quality sensor shutter solenoid ON/OFF Color developer drive clutch ON/OFF Black developer drive clutch ON/OFF Black developer lifting clutch ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller contact clutch ON/OFF Transfer belt cleaner clutch ON/OFF Upper transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF Upper transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF Color developer toner supply clutch ON/OFF Revolver motor ON/OFF (printing operation) Revolver motor operation (at standby position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge Y access position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge M access position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge C access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit Y access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit M access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit C access position) Revolver motor operation (at home position) Revolver motor operation (at developing position) Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement) Charger cleaner motor movement (one reciprocating movement) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 30 04/05 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04). [0][4] [POWER] (Code) [START] ( Operation Continuous test printing ) [CLEAR] [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [0][4] [POWER] (Code) [START] Color (selection ( [START] ( [CLEAR] Operation Continuous test printing [CLEAR] ) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) Notes: 1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error. 2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed. Code Types of test pattern Remarks Grid pattern (black) Grid pattern (color) 219 220 6% test pattern 8% test pattern 231 237 Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Halftone 3 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm 2 2 262 Pattern for jitter evaluation (4 lines ON / 4 lines OFF) 1 pixel standard, for color deviation correction 2 270 Image quality control test pattern For checking the image quality control 2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 10 mm Remarks 142 204 1 2 2 2 2 - 31 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in this adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode. Procedure 1 [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value) [START] [CANCEL] [ENTER] ([FAX] [START]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-). Procedure 2 [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) ( [START] Value displayed ) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (value unchangeable) ([FAX] [START]) (Test copy) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [ENTER] ([FAX] [START]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) Procedure 3 [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [CANCEL] [UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub code) [START] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] ( Stores value in RAM ) ( [FAX] ) [START] (Test copy) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-). Procedure 5 [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] ( Automatic adjustment ) [UP] [ENTER] or or [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] (Adjust a value) Stores value in RAM ( e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 32 ) ( [FAX] ) [START] (Test copy) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Procedure 6 [Digital key] (Code) [0][5] [POWER] Automatic ( adjustment ) [START] [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit) [START] ([FAX] (Test copy) ) *[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] * When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. * Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button. Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [Digital key] (Code) [0][5] [POWER] [START] ( Automatic adjustment ) ( [ENTER] Stores value in RAM ) *[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] ( [FAX] ) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [START] (Test copy) * When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. * Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button. Procedure 10 [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub code) [START] Value ( displayed ) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [START] [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable) Procedure 14 [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub code) [START] [ENTER] [UP] or [DOWN] or (Adjust a value) [INTERRUPT] Stores value in RAM [CANCEL] (Corrects value) ( [CLEAR] (Corrects value) ) ( [FAX] ) [START] (Test copy) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 33 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen. Code Types of test pattern Remarks 1 Grid pattern (Black) Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment 3 4 Grid pattern (Black/Duplex printing) Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment For gamma adjustment (Color/Black integrated pattern) Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment 5 6 For gamma adjustment (Color) For gamma adjustment (Black) Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment For checking the gradation reproduction 7 10 For gamma adjustment (Color) For gamma adjustment (Black) For checking the gradation reproduction Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment 12 13 Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (Y) Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (M) For checking the image of printer section For checking the image of printer section 14 15 Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (C) Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (K) For checking the image of printer section For checking the image of printer section 47 48 Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 600 x 600 dpi) Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600 dpi) Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment 49 50 Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 600 x 600 dpi) Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 1,200 x 600 dpi) Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment 51 52 Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 600 x 600 dpi) Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600 dpi) For checking the gradation reproduction For checking the gradation reproduction 55 Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 2) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 56 Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 3) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 57 Grid pattern (Full Color / OHP) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 58 Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 2) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 59 Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 3) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 60 Grid pattern (Black / OHP) Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 62 63 For color deviation correction (Full Color) For color deviation correction (Full Color) Only for A3/LD size Only for A3/LD size 64 For color deviation correction (Full Color) Only for A3/LD size e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 34 03/12 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. 2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M” stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board. Adjustment mode (05) Code 200 201 202 203 204 206 207 208 210 211-0 211-1 211-2 211-3 212 214 Default ClassifiFunc- ALL Devel- Initialization of All M The value starts changing approx. 3 5 (Y,M,C,K) <0-255> opment color auto-toner minutes after this adjustment started. ALL M The value is automatically set during 5 Y sensor light <0-255> amount correction this adjustment (approx. 2 minutes). M ALL M 5 target value <0-255> (As the value increases, the sensor C ALL M output increases correspondingly.) 5 <0-255> Chapter 3.2) ( K ALL M 5 <0-255> YMC ALL M 5 <0-255> Devel- Initialization of color autoALL M Initializes the color auto-toner sensor 6 opment toner sensor light amount (color) light amount correction target value. correction target value Devel- Enforced correction of color ALL M Performs the color auto-toner sensor 6 opment auto-toner sensor light (color) light amount correction forcibly. amount Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output ALL 225 M When the value decreases, the 1st 3 <0-225> transfer roller bias output increases. adjustment The adjustment value becomes (When not transferred) effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). Y Transfer 1st transfer roller ALL 140 M When the value decreases, the 1st 14 (color) <0-225> bias output transfer roller bias output increases. M M The adjustment value becomes 14 ALL 140 adjustment (color) <0-225> (Image quality effective when the Setting Mode (08C M 541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). 14 ALL 140 control test (color) <0-225> pattern) K M 14 ALL 148 (color) <0-225> Plain Transfer 1st transfer roller M When the value decreases, the 1st 3 ALL 135 paper bias output transfer roller bias output increases. (black) <0-225> adjustment The adjustment value becomes Thick ALL 135 M effective when the Setting Mode (083 paper 1 (black) <0-225> 541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). 215 Thick paper 2 ALL (black) 135 <0-225> M 3 216 Thick paper 3 ALL (black) 135 <0-225> M 3 217 OHP film ALL (black) 135 <0-225> M 3 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 35 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification Default Func- Items 218-0 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output 218-1 adjustment (Plain paper) 218-2 M 218-3 K 220-0 220-1 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 1) Y C Y M 220-2 C 220-3 K 221-0 221-1 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 2) Y M 221-2 C 221-3 K 222-0 222-1 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 3) Y M 222-2 C 222-3 K 223-0 223-1 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (OHP film) Y M 223-2 C 223-3 K 224 225 226 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (When cleaning the roller [+] ) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (When cleaning the roller [-] ) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (Paper interval/When not transferred) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL Contents Procedure When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). 14 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 137 <0-158> M M When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. 3 ALL 196 <159-255> M When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. 3 ALL 169 <159-255> M When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. 3 ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 36 M M M M M M M M When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). M M When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). M M 14 14 14 14 14 14 When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). M M 14 14 M M 14 14 M M 14 14 14 14 14 When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). M 14 14 14 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 227-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (Plain paper) 227-1 227-2 227-3 229-0 229-1 229-2 229-3 230-0 Default Func- Items Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller Single side bias output Reverse adjustment side at (Thick paper 1) duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (Thick paper 2) 234-0 234-1 14 M ALL (color) ALL (color) 137 <0-158> 113 <0-158> M 14 M 14 ALL (black) ALL (black) 137 <0-158> 107 <0-158> M ALL (color) ALL (color) 119 <0-158> 107 <0-158> M 14 M 14 ALL (black) ALL (color) 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> M ALL (black) ALL (color) 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> M ALL (black) ALL (color) 113 <0-158> 107 <0-158> M Transfer 1st transfer roller bias offsetting ALL (color) 5 <0-10> M Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Plain paper) ALL (black) ALL (black) 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> M ALL (color) ALL (color) 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> M Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (Thick paper 3) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (OHP film) 232-1 233 When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). 143 <0-158> 116 <0-158> 231-1 232-0 Procedure ALL (black) ALL (black) 230-1 231-0 Contents 234-2 234-3 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing M M M M M M M When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). Sets the offset amount of 1st transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V Sets the offset amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 1 4 4 4 4 2 - 37 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 236-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 1) Default Func- Items ALL (black) ALL (black) 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> M ALL (color) ALL (color) 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> M 242 M ALL 243 C ALL 244 K ALL 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 78 <0-255> 84 <0-255> 87 <0-255> 94 <0-255> 5 <0-10> M Y ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL 4000 <18004400> 400 <0-500> M 4800 <43205280> 516 <366666> M 236-1 236-2 236-3 237-0 237-1 238-0 238-1 239-0 239-1 241 Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 2) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 3) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (OHP film) Main Main charger grid charger bias adjustment 245 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias offsetting 250 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output voltage 251 252 253 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output voltage ALL (black) +Low ALL +High ALL +Low ALL +High ALL e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 38 04/05 M Contents Sets the offset amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V M M M Procedure 4 4 4 4 Sets the offsetting amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -1,000 V 1: -800 V 2: -600 V 3: -400 V 4: -200 V 5: 0 V 6: +200 V 7: +400 V 8: +600 V 9: +800 V 10: +1,000 V 4 4 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M M M As the value increases, the transformer output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective only when the setting mode (08-549, 551, 556, 557) is 0 (invalid). M M M M 3 3 3 3 Sets the offsetting amount of 1st transfer roller bias. 0: -500 V 1: -400 V 2: -300 V 3: -200 V 4: -100 V 5: 0 V 6: +100 V 7: +200 V 8: +300 V 9: +400 V 10: +500 V Transformer output setting of the 1st transfer roller bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Transformer output setting of the 2nd transfer roller bias (plus output). When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) 1 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code 254 Classification Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output voltage 255 262-0 262-1 262-2 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Image quality control test pattern) 262-3 263 265 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display 267 268 269-1 -Low ALL -110 <-9999-0> M -High ALL -2000 <-9999-0> M Y ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) 140 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 148 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> M M C K 266 269-0 Default Func- Items Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Plain paper) Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Y M 269-2 C 269-3 K 271-0 271-1 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Thick paper 1) Y M 271-2 C 271-3 K 272-0 272-1 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Thick paper 2) Y M 272-2 C 272-3 K November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Contents Procedure Transformer output setting of the 2nd transfer roller bias (minus output). When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 1 1 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 2 M 2 M 2 M 2 M 2 M Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 2 - 39 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 273-0 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Thick paper 3) 273-1 Default Func- Items (+) (-) ALL M ALL (black) ALL (black) 196 <0-255> 143 <0-158> 116 <0-158> M 10 ALL (color) ALL (color) 137 <0-158> 113 <0-158> M 10 M 10 ALL (black) ALL (black) 137 <0-158> 107 <0-158> M M 10 ALL (color) ALL (color) 119 <0-158> 107 <0-158> M 10 M 10 ALL 141 <88-168> M ALL 141 <88-168> M ALL (black) ALL (color) 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> M M K Y M 274-2 C 274-3 K 275 276 277-0 277-1 277-2 277-3 279-0 279-1 279-2 279-3 284 285 290-0 290-1 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias actual value (When cleaning the roller) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias actual value display (Plain paper) Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller Single bias actual value side Reverse display side at (Thick paper 1) duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 2) 10 M 273-3 274-1 Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 137 <0-255> C Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (OHP film) Procedure ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL Y 273-2 274-0 Contents e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 40 04/09 M 10 M 10 M 10 M Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 2 2 Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. When the value increases, the contact timing of transfer belt cleaning unit is delayed. When the value increases, the release timing of transfer belt cleaning unit is delayed. Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 10 10 1 1 10 10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Code Classification 291-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 3) 291-1 292-0 292-1 Items Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (OHP film) 293-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias correction of 293-1 leading/trailing edge of paper 293-2 293-3 293-4 294-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd 294-1 transfer roller bias of leading/trailing edge of paper (Plain paper) 294-2 Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Single side Reverse side at duplex printing Single side 294-3 Reverse side at duplex printing 296-0 Transfer Actual value Single side display of 2nd 296-1 transfer roller bias Reverse of leading/trailing side at duplex edge of paper printing (Thick paper 1) 296-2 Single side 296-3 Reverse side at duplex printing 297-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of 297-1 leading/trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 2) 298-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of 298-1 leading/trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 3) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Contents Procedure Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 10 M ALL (black) ALL (black) 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 113 <0-158> 107 <0-158> 95 <0-255> 75 <0-255> 80 <0-255> 80 <0-255> 80 <0-255> 146 <0-255> 124 <0-255> ALL (color) ALL (color) 141 <0-255> 121 <0-255> M 10 M 10 ALL (black) ALL (black) 144 <0-255> 122 <0-255> M 10 M 10 ALL (color) ALL (color) 131 <0-255> 122 <0-255> M 10 M 10 ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) 146 <0-255> 141 <0-255> 146 <0-255> 141 <0-255> M 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL M M 10 Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. M M M M 10 10 Corrects the 2nd transfer roller bias output of leading/trailing edge of paper (05-227, 229, 230, 231 and 232). Correcting factor: % 14 14 14 M 14 M 14 M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias on the leading/trailing edge of paper when printing is performed. (The value corrected in 05-293 is displayed.) 10 10 2 - 41 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification Default Func- Items 299-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of 299-1 leading/trailing edge of paper (OHP film) 305 306 308 330-0 330-1 330-2 330-3 331-0 331-1 331-2 331-3 332-0 332-1 332-2 332-3 333-0 333-1 333-2 333-3 334 335 Scanner Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section) Scanner Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section) Scanner Distortion mode Image Image quality control closed-loop control contrast voltage correction/ Mode 2 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control laser power correction/ Mode 2 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control contrast voltage correction/ Mode 1 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control laser power correction/ Mode 1 maximum number of time corrected Image control Image control ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL ALL 121 <0-255> 116 <0-255> M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias on the leading/trailing edge M of paper when printing is performed. (The value corrected in 05-293 is displayed.) 124 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the <92-164> image shifts by approx. 0.137mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. 113 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the <0-255> image shifts by approx. 0.0423mm toward the front side of the paper. ALL - - Y ALL M M ALL C ALL K ALL Y ALL M ALL C ALL K ALL Y ALL M ALL C ALL K ALL Y ALL M ALL C ALL K ALL 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 300 <270-330> 1200 <10801320> Main charger grid calibration voltage 1 (low) Main charger grid calibration voltage 2 (high) ALL ALL Contents e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 42 04/09 M Moves carriages to the adjusting position. ( Chapter 3. 4. 4.) Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control mode 2. Procedure 10 10 1 1 6 4 4 M 4 M 4 M M Sets the maximum correction number of time of the laser power in the closed-loop control mode 2. 4 4 M 4 M 4 M M Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control mode 1. 4 4 M 4 M 4 M M Sets the maximum correction number of time of the laser power in the closed-loop control mode 1. 4 4 M 4 M 4 M M Transformer output calibration of the main charger grid bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 338 Image control Image control 339 340 354 RADF 356 RADF 357 RADF 358 RADF 360 363 364 365 Color developer bias DC (-) calibration voltage 1 (low) Color developer bias DC (-) calibration voltage 2 (high) Scanner Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section) 355 359 Default Func- Items Adjustment of RADF paper alignment ALL ALL ALL for singlesided original for double sided original Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization Fine adjustment of RADF transport speed ALL RADF sideways deviation adjustment ALL 100 <85-115> 900 <810-990> Transformer output calibration of the color developer bias. When replacing M the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) 127 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the <0-255> reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. 10 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the <0-20> aligning amount increases by approx. 0.5mm. 10 SYS <0-20> ALL - ALL 50 <0-100> ALL 128 <0-255> Scanner Carriage position adjustment ALL during scanning from RADF (black) ALL (color) Scanner Data transfer of SCN characteristic value of scanner / SYS board -> SLG board 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> - Scanner Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SLG board -> SYS board SCN - for singlesided original for double sided original ALL 50 <0-100> ALL 50 <0-100> RADF RADF leading edge position adjustment 366 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Contents M SYS Performs the adjustment and initialization when the RADF board or RADF sensor is replaced. SYS When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction on original (fed from the RADF) increases by approx. 0.1%. SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0423mm. SYS When the value increases by “1”, the carriage position shifts by approx. 0.1 SYS mm toward the exit side when using the RADF. SYS Transfers the characteristic values of the scanner (shading correction factor / RGB color correction / reproduction ratio color aberration correction) from the NVRAM of the SYS board to the NVRAM of the SLG board. SYS Transfers the characteristic values of the scanner (shading correction factor / RGB color correction / reproduction ratio color aberration correction) from the NVRAM of the SLG board to the NVRAM of the SYS board. SYS When the value increases by “1”, the copied image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the trailing edge SYS of paper by approx. 0.1mm. Procedure 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 6 6 1 1 2 - 43 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/10 Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Code Classification 367 RADF RADF original guide width adjustment (Minimum) ALL - - 368 RADF RADF original guide width adjustment (Maximum) ALL - - 372 Image Black developer bias DC control (-) calibration voltage 1 (low) ALL 100 <85-115> M 373 ALL 900 <810-990> M ALL 380-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 381-2 C ALL 381-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 382-2 C ALL 382-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 383-2 C ALL 383-3 K ALL 320 <0-999> 330 <0-999> 340 <0-999> 375 <0-999> 320 <0-999> 330 <0-999> 340 <0-999> 375 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255> M 380-2 Image Black developer bias DC control (-) calibration voltage 2 (high) Image Image quality Y control open-loop control/ M contrast voltage initial value C display 380-0 380-1 381-0 381-1 382-0 382-1 383-0 383-1 Items Image Contrast voltage control actual value display Image Image quality control open-loop control/ laser power initial value display Image Laser power control actual value display ALL ALL e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 44 M Contents Procedure Stores the current width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the minimum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-356) is performed. Stores the current width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the maximum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-356) is performed. Transformer output calibration of the black developer bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) 6 Displays the contrast voltage initial value set by the open-loop control. (Unit: V) 10 6 1 1 10 M 10 M 10 M Displays the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M M Displays the laser power initial value set by the open-loop control. (Unit: µW) 10 10 M 10 M 10 M Displays the laser power when printing is operated. (bit value) 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 384-0 Image Laser power control actual value display Default Func- Items Y ALL M ALL 384-2 C ALL 384-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 385-2 C ALL 385-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 386-2 C ALL 386-3 K ALL When the light source is OFF Transfer belt surface Highdensity pattern Y Highdensity pattern M Highdensity pattern C Highdensity pattern K ALL 384-1 385-0 385-1 386-0 386-1 388 Image Main charger grid control bias actual value display Image Developer bias control DC (-) actual value display Image Output value control display of image quality sensor 389 390-0 390-1 390-2 390-3 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Contents Displays the laser power when printing is operated. (Unit: µW) Procedure 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 78 <0-255> 84 <0-255> 87 <0-255> 94 <0-255> 135 <0-255> 137 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 146 <0-255> 0 <0-1023> M 10 M Displays the output value of image quality sensor when the sensor light source is OFF. 2 ALL 0 <0-1023> M 2 ALL 0 <0-1023> M ALL 0 <0-1023> M Displays the output value of image quality sensor (when there is no test pattern) on the transfer belt. Displays the output value of image quality sensor when a high-density test pattern is written. The larger the value is, the smaller the toner amount adhered becomes. ALL 0 <0-1023> M 10 ALL 0 <0-1023> M 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M Displays the main charger grid bias when printing is operated. (bit value) 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M Displays the developer bias when printing is operated. (bit value) 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 10 10 2 - 45 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code 391-0 Classification Default Func- Items Procedure Displays the output value of image quality sensor when a low-density test pattern is written. The larger the value is, the smaller the toner amount adhered becomes. 10 Lowdensity pattern Y Lowdensity pattern M Lowdensity pattern C Lowdensity pattern K Image Light amount adjustment control result of image quality sensor ALL 0 <0-1023> M ALL 0 <0-1023> M ALL 0 <0-1023> M 10 ALL 0 <0-1023> M 10 ALL 0 <0-255> M ALL 0 <0-100> M ALL - M ALL - ALL ALL 398-1 Image Relative humidity display control during latest closed-loop control Image Enforced performing of control image quality open-loop control Image Enforced performing of control image quality closed-loop control Image Image quality control control initialization Y Image Target value of the control high image density M control 398-2 C ALL 398-3 K ALL 391-1 391-2 391-3 392 393 394 395 396 398-0 401 Image Output value control display of image quality sensor Contents Laser 405 410 Laser 411 Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (reproduction ratio adjustment) Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position ALL PRT PPC PPC PRT K ALL 417-1 C ALL 417-2 M ALL 417-3 Y ALL 417-0 Image Color deviation correction 1 10 The LED light amount adjustment value of this sensor is the reference value to set the reflected light from the belt surface. Displays the relative humidity at the latest performing of the closed-loop control. Performs the image quality open-loop control. 2 M Performs the image quality closedloop control. 6 - M 6 255 <220-330> 280 <220-330> 295 <220-330> 370 <300-420> 134 <0-255> 135 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 120 <0-255> 127 <118-138> 127 <118-138> 128 <118-138> 129 <118-138> M Performs the image quality control, initialize each control value. Sets the target value of high image density control at the time of the image quality control. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 46 04/09 M 2 6 4 4 M 4 M 4 M M M M M M When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.07%. (approx. 0.1mm/step) When the value increases by “1”, the writing start position shifts to the front side by approx. 0.0423mm. 1 When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by 0.0423 mm (effective for all pages of continuous printing). 4 1 1 1 4 M 4 M 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 418-0 Image Default Func- Items K ALL 418-1 C ALL 418-2 M ALL 418-3 Y ALL 421 Drive 422 424 Drive Color deviation correction 2 Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (fine adjustment of main motor speed) Fine adjustment of exit motor speed 425 426 Drive 427 430 Image 431 Image 432 Image 433 Image 434-0 Image 434-1 Image 435 Image Procedure When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by 0.0423 mm (effective for the 2nd and following pages on the continuous printing). 4 130 <118-138> 128 <118-138> 128 <118-138> 128 <118-138> 127 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 107 <0-255> EUR: 140 UC: 140 JPN: 128 Others: 140 <0-255> 153 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 26 <0-255> M PPC 0 <0-255> M 1 PPC 15 <0-255> M 1 PPC 43 <0-255> M 1 PPC /PRT EUR: 45 UC: 28 JPN: 28 Others: 45 <0-255> 18 <0-255> M 4 M 4 24 <0-255> M 1 PPC /PRT FAX PPC /PRT FAX Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (fine adjustment of transport motor speed) Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) /Reverse side at duplexing PPC /PRT FAX Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) /Reverse side at duplexing Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) PPC /PRT November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Contents PPC PRT M M M M M M M M M M 4 4 4 When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.04%. When the value increases by “1”, the rotation becomes faster by approx. 0.05%. 1 When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.04%. When the value increases by “1”, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423mm. 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 47 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/09 Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Code Classification Items 436 Image 437 Image 438 Image 439 Image 440 Laser Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction) when paper size is not specified at bypass feed Upper Secondary drawer scanning laser Lower writing start drawer position Bypass feeding LCF 441 442 443 PRT 0 <0-255> M 1 PRT 0 <0-255> M 1 ALL 128 <0-255> M When the value increases by “1”, the margin increases by approx. 0.2 mm. 1 ALL 21 <0-40> 47 <0-80> 22 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 21 <0-40> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 15 <0-63> M When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.2 mm. 1 ALL ALL ALL 445 Duplex feeding Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 ALL 448-2 448-3 449-0 449-1 449-2 449-3 450-0 450-1 450-2 450-3 Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP lower drawer / Plain paper) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Upper drawer / Plain paper) 1 M ALL 448-1 When the value increases by “1”, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423mm. 0 <0-255> PFP Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Plain paper) Procedure PRT 444 448-0 Contents ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 48 04/09 M 1 M 1 M 1 M 1 M 1 M M M M When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size 1: 205mm to 219mm Short size 2: 204mm or shorter 4 4 4 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 452-0 Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer / Plain paper) 452-1 452-2 452-3 455-0 455-1 455-2 457 458-0 458-1 458-2 460-0 460-1 460-2 461-0 461-1 461-2 462-0 462-1 462-2 462-3 463-0 463-1 463-2 Default Func- Items Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Duplex feeding / Plain paper) Paper Paper aligning amount adjustfeeding ment at the registration section (LCF / Plain paper) Paper Paper aligning Long feeding amount adjustment size at the registration Middle size section (Bypass Short feeding/Plain paper) size Paper Paper aligning Long feeding amount adjustment size at the registration Middle size section (Bypass Short feeding/Thick paper 1) size Paper Paper aligning Long feeding amount adjustment size at the registration Middle size section (Bypass Short feeding/Thick paper 2) size Paper Paper aligning Long size feeding amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (Bypass size feeding/Thick Post paper 3) card Paper Paper aligning Long size feeding amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (Bypass feeding/OHP film) size November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC ALL Contents Procedure When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size 1: 205mm to 219mm Short size 2: 204mm or shorter When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size: 219mm or shorter * Postcard is supported only for JPN model. 4 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 23 <0-63> 23 <0-63> 33 <0-63> M ALL 15 <0-63> M ALL 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 17 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 17 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 16 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL M M M M M M 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 - 49 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 466-0 Paper Adjustment of feeding paper pushing amount / Bypass feeding 466-1 466-4 466-6 466-7 468-0 468-1 469-1 469-2 469-3 470-0 470-1 470-2 470-3 471-0 471-1 471-2 471-3 ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Paper Adjustment of paper feeding pushing amount/Duplex feeding (short size) ALL Finisher Fine adjustment of binding position /folding position A4-R /LT-R B4 ALL A3/LD ALL Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 ALL 468-2 469-0 Plain paper Post card Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film 466-5 467 Default Func- Items Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Upper drawer / Thick paper 1) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer / Thick paper 1) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Thick paper 1) ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 143 <0-255> 198 <0-255> 143 <0-255> 143 <0-255> 143 <0-255> 143 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 0 <-14-14> 0 <-14-14> 0 <-14-14> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 50 M M M M Contents Procedure When the value increases by “1”, the driving speed of bypass feed roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. * Post card is supported only for JPN model. 4 4 4 4 M 4 M 4 M M M When the value increases by “1”, the driving speed of ADU transport roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. When the value increases by “1”, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page by 0.25mm. M M M M M 1 4 4 4 When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size 1: 205mm to 219mm Short size 2: 204mm or shorter 4 4 4 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code 472-0 472-1 472-2 472-3 473 474-0 474-1 474-2 475-0 475-1 475-2 475-3 475-4 475-5 475-6 475-7 475-8 475-9 ClassifiItems cation Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP lower drawer / Thick paper 1) Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Paper Paper aligning amount feeding adjustment at the registration section (LCF / Thick paper 1) Long Paper Paper aligning size feeding amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (ADU / Thick paper 1) size Paper Paper aligning Thick feeding amount adjustpaper 2 Long size ment at the Thick registration paper 2 section (Bypass Middle feeding) size Thick paper 2 Short size Thick paper 3 Long size Thick paper 3 Middle size Thick paper 3 Short size OHP film Long size OHP film Middle size OHP film Short size Post card November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default ProceFunc- ALL 15 M When the value increases by "1", the 4 <0-63> aligning amount increases by approx. ALL M 0.8mm. 4 15 <0-63> ALL M Long size: 330mm or longer 4 15 <0-63> Middle size: 220mm to 329mm ALL M Short size: 219mm or shorter 4 15 <0-63> Short size 1: 205mm to 219mm ALL M Short size 2: 204mm or shorter 1 15 <0-63> * Post card is supported only for JPN model. ALL 25 <0-63> 25 <0-63> 33 <0-63> 28 <0-63> M 4 M 4 M 4 M 4 ALL 28 <0-63> M 4 ALL 28 <0-63> M 4 ALL 28 <0-63> M 4 ALL 28 <0-63> M 4 ALL 28 <0-63> M 4 ALL 24 <0-63> 24 <0-63> M 4 M 4 ALL 24 <0-63> M 4 ALL 28 <0-63> M 4 ALL ALL ALL ALL 2 - 51 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code 494 495 ClassifiItems cation Laser Secondary scanning data laser writing start position 496 497-0 Laser 497-1 497-2 497-3 497-4 497-5 498-0 Laser 498-1 501 Image 503 504 505 Image 506 507 508 Image 509 510 512 514 515 Image Adjustment of drawer sideways deviation When decelerating to 1/2 When decelerating to 1/3 When decelerating to 1/4 Upper drawer Lower drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF Default ProceFunc- ALL 1 135 M When the value increases by “1”, the <0-255> image shifts by approx. 0.2 mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. ALL 135 M 1 <0-255> ALL 128 <0-255> M ALL 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> M M 4 ALL 128 <0-255> M 4 ALL 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 131 <0-255> 131 <0-255> M 4 M 4 ALL ALL Bypass ALL feeding Adjustment of ALL Long size duplex feeding sideways devia- Short size ALL (A4/LT or tion smaller) Density adjustment Photo PPC (black) Fine adjustment Text PPC of “manual /Photo (black) density” Text PPC /Center value (black) Density adjustment Text PPC (black) Fine adjustment of /Photo PPC “manual density” Photo (black) /Light step value Text PPC (black) Density adjustment Text PPC (black) Fine adjustment of /Photo PPC “manual density” Photo (black) /Dark step value Text PPC (black) Density adjustment Photo PPC (black) Fine adjustment of PPC “automatic density” Text /Photo (black) Text PPC (black) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 52 04/09 M M 1 When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423mm. 4 4 When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423mm. 4 SYS When the value increases, the image of the center step density becomes SYS darker. 1 SYS 1 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. SYS When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter. SYS 1 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. SYS When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS 1 M 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code 532 533 ClassifiItems cation Image Range correction Text Background peak /Photo Photo adjustment 534 570 Text Image Range correction Text on original /Photo manually set on the original glass 571 Photo 572 Text 580 Image 590-0 Image 590-1 Automatic gamma adjustment L Adjustment of gamma balance M (Text/Photo) 590-2 591-0 H Image 591-1 Adjustment of gamma balance (Text) 591-2 592-0 Image Adjustment of gamma balance (Photo) 592-2 596-1 M H 592-1 596-0 L L M H Image Adjustment of gamma balance (PS/Smooth) 596-2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC L M H Default ProceFunc- PPC 1 40 SYS When the value increases, the (black) <0-255> background of the image (low density SYS area) becomes harder to be printed 1 PPC 16 (black) <0-255> out. SYS 1 PPC 40 (black) <0-255> SYS Sets whether the values of the 1 PPC 22 background peak and text peak are (black) <11-14, fixed or not. One’s place is an 21-24, adjustment for “automatic density” 31-34, 41-44> and ten’s place is for “manual PPC SYS density”. Once they are fixed, the 1 12 (black) <11-14, range correction is performed with 21-24, standard values. The values of the 31-34, background peak and text peak affect 41-44> the reproduction of the background PPC SYS density and text density respectively. 1 22 (black) <11-14, Background peak Text peak 21-24, 1: fixed fixed 31-34, 2: varied fixed 41-44> 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied PPC - Adjusts the gradation reproduction 7 (black) automatically. 128 SYS When the value increases, the 4 PPC (black) <0-255> density in the target area becomes SYS higher. 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> H : High density area SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> 2 - 53 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code 597-0 597-1 ClassifiItems cation Image Adjustment of gamma balance (PS/Detail) L M 597-2 598-0 H Image 598-1 Adjustment of gamma balance (PCL/Smooth) L M 598-2 599-0 H Image 599-1 Adjustment of gamma balance (PCL/Detail) L M 599-2 604 H Image Sharpness adjustment 605 Text /Photo Text 606 Photo 648 Image Adjustment of smudged/faint text Text /Photo 654 Image Adjustment of smudged/faint text PS 655 PCL 663 Image Dot size adjustment in black printing 664 Image Upper limit in toner saving mode 665 PS PCL Default ProceFunc- PRT 128 SYS When the value increases, the 4 (black) <0-255> density in the target area becomes SYS higher. 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> H : High density area SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the image 1 PPC 0 (black) <0-31> becomes sharper. When the value deSYS creases, the image becomes softer. 1 PPC 0 (black) <0-31> The smaller the value is, the less the SYS moire becomes. 1 PPC 0 (black) <0-31> * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). PPC 30 SYS Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. 1 (black) <0-255> With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. PRT 5 SYS When the value decreases, the width 1 (black) <0-9> of text becomes wider. SYS 1 PRT 5 (black) <0-9> SYS Adjusts the dot size of primary 1 PRT 255 scanning direction in black printing. (black) <0-255> The smaller the value is, the dot becomes smaller. PRT 176 SYS When the value decreases, the 1 (black) <0-255> printing density becomes lighter. SYS 1 PRT 176 (black) <0-255> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 54 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code 667-0 667-1 667-2 667-3 667-4 693 ClassifiItems cation Image Setting beam Beam level conversion level 0/4 Beam level 1/4 Beam level 2/4 Beam level 3/4 Beam level 4/4 Image Range correction Text on original set on /Photo the RADF 694 Photo 695 Text 700 Image 701 Adjustment of binarized threshold (Text) 702 710 719 Light step value Dark step value Image Density adjustPhoto ment “manual density” fine adjustment/Center Text /Photo value Image Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/Light step value 714 715 Center value November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default ProceFunc- PPC 0 M Sets the beam level for 4 divided 4 (black) <0-255> smoothing. The primary scanning M direction is divided into 4 and the dot 4 PPC 63 (black) <0-255> width is set at the 5 levels (incl. level M “0”). The smaller the value is, the 4 PPC 127 (black) <0-255> smaller the primary scanning M direction of the dot becomes. 4 PPC 191 (black) <0-255> M 4 PPC 255 (black) <0-255> SYS Sets whether the values of the back- 1 PPC 22 ground peak and text peak are fixed or (black) <11-14, not. One’s place is an adjustment for 21-24 “automatic density” and ten’s place is 31-34 for “manual density”. Once they are 41-44> fixed, the range correction is performed PPC 12 SYS with standard values. 1 (black) <11-14, The values of the background peak 21-24, and text peak affect the reproduction 31-34, of the background density and text 41-44> density respectively. Background peak Text peak PPC 22 SYS 1: 1 fixed fixed (black) <11-14, 2: varied fixed 21-24, 3: fixed varied 31-34 4: varied varied 41-44> FAX SYS When the value increases, the image 1 125 (black) <0-255> of center value density becomes darker. FAX 20 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step 1 (black) <0-255> at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of “light” side becomes lighter. FAX 20 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step 1 (black) <0-255> at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of “dark” side becomes darker. FAX 128 SYS When the value increases, the image 1 (black) <0-255> of the center step density becomes darker. FAX 128 SYS 1 (black) <0-255> Photo FAX (black) Text /Photo FAX (black) 20 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step <0-255> at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image 20 SYS of the “light” steps becomes lighter. <0-255> 1 1 2 - 55 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 720 Image 724 725 Image 729 825 Image Default Func- Items Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/Dark step value Photo FAX (black) Text /Photo FAX (black) Density adjustment “automatic density” fine adjustment Range correction on original manually set on the original glass Photo FAX (black) FAX (black) SCN (black) Text /Photo Text /Photo 826 Text SCN (black) 827 Photo SCN (black) 828 Gray scale SCN (black) 830 Image Range correction Text on original set on /Photo the RADF SCN (black) 831 Text SCN (black) 832 Photo SCN (black) 833 Gray scale SCN (black) Contents Procedure SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step 20 <0-255> at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image 20 SYS of the “dark” steps becomes darker. <0-255> 1 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual SYS density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the SYS background density and text density respectively. Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed SYS 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied 1 SYS Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual SYS density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction SYS of the background density and text density respectively. Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed SYS 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied 1 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 56 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 835 Image Default Func- Items 836 Range correction Text Background peak /Photo Text adjustment 837 Photo 838 841 Gray scale Text/ Photo Text 842 Photo 843 Gray scale Text /Photo Text 840 845 Image Image 846 847 848 Image 850 Image 851 852 Sharpness adjustment Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/Center Photo value Fine adjustment of background / Center value Text Density adjust/Photo ment “manual Text density” fine adjustment/Light Photo step value 853 Image Fine adjustment of background / Light step value (Image smoothing) 855 Image Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/Dark step value 856 857 Text /Photo Text Photo 858 Image Fine adjustment of background / Dark step value (Image smoothing) 860 Image Density adjustment “automatic density” fine adjustment 861 862 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Text /Photo Text Photo SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) 56 <0-255> 64 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 35 <0-255> Contents Procedure SYS When the value increases, the background of the image (low density SYS area) becomes harder to be printed out. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value SYS decreases, the image becomes softer. SYS The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. SYS * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS When the value increases, the background becomes darker. SYS When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at background adjustment. When the value increases, the background of the “light” steps becomes lighter. 20 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> of the “dark” steps becomes darker. SYS 20 <0-255> SYS 20 <0-255> SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step 20 at background adjustment. When the <0-255> value increases, the background of the “dark” steps becomes darker. 128 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 57 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code 880-0 880-1 880-2 881-0 881-1 881-2 882-0 882-1 882-2 883-0 883-1 883-2 884 976 1000 1001 1002 1003 1010-0 1010-1 1010-2 Default ProceFunc- L 128 SCN SYS When the value increases, the density 4 (black) <0-255> in the target area becomes higher. M SYS L : Low density area 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> M : Medium density area H SYS H : High density area 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Text) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Photo) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Gray scale) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Reproduction ratio fine SYS When the value increases by “1”, the 1 SCN 128 adjustment of primary reproduction ratio of primary scanning (black) <0-255> scanning direction direction increases by approx. 0.1%. Effective with the resolution other than 600 dpi. Mainte- Equipment number (serial ALL SYS When this adjustment is performed 1 nance number) display with this code, the setting code (08995) is also performed automatically. (10 digits) Image Automatic PRT SYS Adjusts the gradation reproduction 7 PS gamma for each color, Y, M, C and K. /600x600dpi (color) SYS 7 PRT adjustment PS /1200x600dpi (color) SYS 7 PRT PCL /600x600dpi (color) SYS 7 PRT PCL /1200x600dpi (color) Image Color balance L 128 SYS The target color, mode and density 4 PRT (color) <0-255> adjustment for “Y” area become darker as the value M SYS increases. 4 PRT 128 (PS/600x600dpi/ (color) <0-255> Smooth) L : Low density area H SYS M : Medium density area 4 PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area ClassifiItems cation Image Adjustment of gamma balance (Text/Photo) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 58 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) ClassifiItems cation 1011-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “M” 1011-1 (PS/600x600dpi/ Smooth) 1011-2 Code 1012-0 Image 1012-1 Color balance adjustment for “C” (PS/600x600dpi/ Smooth) 1012-2 1013-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (PS/600x600dpi/ Smooth) 1013-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (PS/600x600dpi/ Detail) 1014-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “M” (PS/600x600dpi/ Detail) 1015-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (PS/600x600dpi/ Detail) 1016-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (PS/600x600dpi/ Detail) 1017-2 1018-1 L M L M L M L M H 1017-1 1018-0 M H 1016-1 1017-0 L H 1015-1 1016-0 H H 1014-1 1015-0 M H 1013-1 1014-0 L L M H Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (PS/1200x600dpi/ Smooth) 1018-2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC L M H Default Func- PRT 128 SYS The target color, mode and density (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 - 59 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 1019-0 Image 1019-1 Color balance adjustment for “M” (PS/1200x600dpi/ Smooth) 1019-2 1020-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (PS/1200x600dpi/ Smooth) 1020-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (PS/1200x600dpi/ Smooth) 1021-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (PS/1200x600dpi/ Detail) 1022-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “M” (PS/1200x600dpi/ Detail) 1023-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (PS/1200x600dpi/ Detail) 1024-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (PS/1200x600dpi/ Detail) 1025-2 1026-1 1026-2 M L M L M L M H 1025-1 1026-0 L H 1024-1 1025-0 M H 1023-1 1024-0 L H 1022-1 1023-0 M H 1021-1 1022-0 L H 1020-1 1021-0 Default Func- Items L M H Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (PCL/600x600dpi/ Smooth) L M H PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 60 Contents Procedure SYS The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value SYS increases. L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area H : High density area SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 1027-0 Image 1027-1 Color balance adjustment for “M” (PCL/600x600dpi/ Smooth) 1027-2 1028-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (PCL/600x600dpi/ Smooth) 1028-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (PCL/600x600dpi/ Smooth) 1029-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (PCL/600x600dpi/ Detail) 1030-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “M” (PCL/600x600dpi/ Detail) 1031-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (PCL/600x600dpi/ Detail) 1032-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (PCL/600x600dpi/ Detail) 1033-2 1034-1 1034-2 M L M L M L M H 1033-1 1034-0 L H 1032-1 1033-0 M H 1031-1 1032-0 L H 1030-1 1031-0 M H 1029-1 1030-0 L H 1028-1 1029-0 Default Func- Items L M H Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Smooth) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC L M H PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> Contents Procedure SYS The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value SYS increases. L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area H : High density area SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 2 - 61 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 1035-0 Image 1035-1 1035-2 1036-0 Image 1036-1 1036-2 1037-0 Image 1037-1 1037-2 1038-0 Image 1038-1 1038-2 1039-0 Image 1039-1 1039-2 1040-0 Image 1040-1 1040-2 1041-0 Image 1041-1 1041-2 1046-0 Image 1046-1 1047-0 1047-1 Image Default Func- Items Color balance adjustment for “M” (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Color balance adjustment for “C” (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Color balance adjustment for “K” (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Color balance adjustment for “Y” (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Detail) Color balance adjustment for “M” (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Detail) Color balance adjustment for “C” (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Detail) Color balance adjustment for “K” (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Detail) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Plain paper) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 1) L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H PS PCL PS PCL PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 62 Contents Procedure SYS The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value SYS increases. L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area H : High density area SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. SYS Note: When the value increases, the image SYS offsetting may occur. 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 1048-0 Image 1048-1 1049-0 Image 1049-1 1050-0 Image 1050-1 1055 Image 1056 Default Func- Items Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 2) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 3) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (OHP film) Upper limit in toner saving mode PS PCL PS PCL PS PCL 1057 1058 PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) SCN (color) 1060 Image Reproduction ratio fine adjustment of primary scanning direction 1065 Image Judgment threshold for ACS SCN (color) 1066 Image Judgment threshold for ACS on original set on the RADF 1070 Image Fine adjustment of background 1071 Printed image Photo 1072 1075 Image Fine adjustment of black density 1076 1081 1082 Text Printed image Photo 1077 1080 Text Image RGB conversion Text method selection Printed image Photo November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 200 <0-255> 200 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 128 <0-255> Contents Procedure SYS When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. SYS Note: When the value increases, the image SYS offsetting may occur. 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS When the value decreases, the printing density becomes lighter. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 4 4 1 1 SCN (color) SYS When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.1%. Effective with the resolution other than 600 dpi. 70 SYS When the value increases, originals <0-255> tend to be judged as monochrome, and when the value decreases, they 70 SYS tend to be judged as color in auto<0-255> color mode. SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) 0 <0-50> 0 <0-50> 0 <0-50> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-3> 0 <0-3> 0 <0-3> SYS Adjusts the level of background. When the value increases, the background SYS becomes more brightened. 1 SYS 1 SYS Adjusts the black density of the scanned image. When the value SYS increases, the black density becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. SYS 0: sRGB 1: AppleRGB 2: ROMMRGB 3: AdobeRGB SYS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 63 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 1086 Image Default Func- Items Text SCN (color) 0 <0-31> 1087 Printed image SCN (color) 0 <0-31> 1088 Photo SCN (color) 0 <0-31> Text /Photo Text PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 1550 Image 1551 1552 Sharpness adjustment Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/Center value 1553 Printed image Photo 1554 Map 1560 Image 1561 1562 Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/Dark step value Text /Photo Text 1563 Printed image Photo 1564 Map 1570 Image 1571 1572 Density adjustment “manual density” fine adjustment/Light step value Text /Photo Text 1573 Printed image Photo 1574 Map 1580 1581 1582 Image Density adjustment “automatic density” fine adjustment Text /Photo Text 1583 Printed image Photo 1584 Map e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 64 Contents Procedure SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes SYS softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. SYS * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). 1 SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. SYS When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. SYS When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 1612 Image 1613 Adjustment of maximum toner amount 1614 1615 1616 1630 Image 1631 Default Func- Items Maximum text density adjustment Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Y M 1632 C 1633 K 1642 Image Automatic gamma Color/ adjustment Black 1643 Color 1675 Image Judgment threshold for ACS 1676 Image 1688 Image Judgment threshold for ACS on original set on the RADF Text Automatic offsetting adjust- /Photo Text ment for background processing (background Printed image density) Photo 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 Map Image Automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing (text density) Text /Photo Text 1696 Printed image Photo 1697 Map November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC PPC PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 255 <0-255> 249 <0-255> 237 <0-255> 237 <0-255> 249 <0-255> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> - Contents Procedure SYS When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. SYS Note: When the value increases, image SYS offsetting may occur. 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the maximum text density of each color SYS becomes darker. 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS Automatic adjustment of gradation reproduction in the Full Color Mode (each color of Y, M, C and K) and Black Mode. SYS Automatic adjustment of gradation reproduction in the Full Color Mode (each color of Y, M, C and K). 70 SYS When the value increases, originals <0-255> tend to be judged as black, and when SYS the value decreases, they tend to be 70 <0-255> judged as color in auto-color mode. SYS When the value increases, the 128 <0-255> background becomes darker. SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the text 128 <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> 1 1 1 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 65 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 1698 Image 1699 1700 Default Func- Items Manual offsetting adjustment for background processing (background density) Text /Photo Text 1701 Printed image Photo 1702 Map 1708 Image 1709 1710 Manual offsetting adjustment for background processing (text density) Text /Photo Text 1711 Printed image Photo 1712 Map 1725 Image Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment 1737 Image Sharpness adjustment / Full Color Mode 1738 1739 Text /Photo Text 1740 Printed image Photo 1741 Map 1757 Image Sharpness adjustment /Auto Color Mode (Text/Photo) Contents PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 0 <0-5> PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> SYS *The default value 0 is equivalent to 0 <0-31> 16 (center value). SYS 0 <0-31> EUR: 0 SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value UC: 0 decreases, the image becomes JAPN: 22 softer. The smaller the value is, the <0-31> less the moire becomes. * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16(center value). e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 66 04/10 Procedure SYS When the value increases, the background becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS When the value increases, the text becomes darker. SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 1 SYS 0: Default 1: Photo oriented 2 (The printed image reproduction level higher than that of the Photo oriented 1) 2: Photo oriented 1 (The printed image reproduction level higher than that of the Default) 3: Equivalent to the Default 4: Text oriented 1 (The text reproduction level higher than that of the Default) 5: Text oriented 2 (The text reproduction level higher than that of the Text oriented 1) SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value deSYS creases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the SYS moire becomes. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code 1761 1769 ClassifiItems cation Image Black reproduction switching Image Setting for highlighter Vivid 1770 Clear 1771 Warm 1772 Cool 1779-0 Image 1779-1 Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Text/Photo) 1779-2 1780-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Text) 1780-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Printed image) 1781-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Photo) 1782-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “Y” (Map) 1783-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “M” (Text/Photo) 1784-2 1785-1 M L M L M H 1784-1 1785-0 L H 1783-1 1784-0 M H 1782-1 1783-0 L H 1781-1 1782-0 M H 1780-1 1781-0 L L M H Image Color balance adjustment for “M” (Text) 1785-2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC L M H Default ProceFunc- PPC SYS 0: Default 1 0 (color) <0-1> 1: Black reproduction oriented SYS Sets the reproduction mode for 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-2> highlighter for four types of one touch SYS adjustment. 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-2> 0: Default SYS 1: Highlighter 1 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-2> 2: Highlighter 2 SYS 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-2> SYS The target color, mode and density 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> 2 - 67 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Adjustment mode (05) ClassifiItems cation 1786-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “M” 1786-1 (Printed image) M 1786-2 H Code 1787-0 Image 1787-1 Color balance adjustment for “M” (Photo) 1787-2 1788-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “M” (Map) 1788-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (Text/Photo) 1789-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (Text) 1790-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (Printed image) 1791-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (Photo) 1792-2 1793-1 1793-2 L M L M L M H 1792-1 1793-0 M H 1791-1 1792-0 L H 1790-1 1791-0 M H 1789-1 1790-0 L H 1788-1 1789-0 L L M H Image Color balance adjustment for “C” (Map) L M H Default Func- PPC SYS The target color, mode and density 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 68 Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) ClassifiItems cation 1794-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” 1794-1 (Text/Photo) M 1794-2 H Code 1795-0 Image 1795-1 Color balance adjustment for “K” (Text) 1795-2 1796-0 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (Printed image) 1796-2 Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (Photo) 1797-2 1798-1 L M L M H Image Color balance adjustment for “K” (Map) 1798-2 1800-0 M H 1797-1 1798-0 L H 1796-1 1797-0 L L M H Image Upper limit value control of contrast voltage Y 1800-1 M 1800-2 C 1800-3 K 1801-0 Image Lower limit value control of contrast voltage Y 1801-1 M 1801-2 C 1801-3 K November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default Func- PPC 128 SYS The target color, mode and density (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M Sets the upper limit value of the ALL 650 <0-999> contrast voltage at the image quality ALL M control. (Unit: V) 650 <0-999> ALL M 650 <0-999> ALL M 600 <0-999> ALL M Sets the lower limit value of the 120 <0-999> contrast voltage at the image quality ALL M control. (Unit: V) 120 <0-999> ALL M 120 <0-999> ALL M 120 <0-999> Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 - 69 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/09 Adjustment mode (05) ClassifiItems cation 1802-0 Image Upper limit value control of laser power 1802-1 M 1802-2 C 1802-3 K Code 1803-0 Image Lower limit value control of laser power Y Y 1803-1 M 1803-2 C 1803-3 K 1804-0 1804-1 Image Background control voltage actual value display Y M 1804-2 C 1804-3 K 1805-0 1805-1 Image Drum surface control potential characteristic/slope factor display Y M 1805-2 C 1805-3 K 1806-0 1806-1 Image Drum surface control potential characteristic/offset factor display Y M 1806-2 C 1806-3 K 1807-0 1807-1 1807-2 1807-3 Image Drum exposure control voltage characteristic/slope factor display (main charger grid low voltage area) Y M C K Default Func- ALL 800 M <0-999> ALL M 800 <0-999> ALL M 800 <0-999> ALL M 800 <0-999> ALL M 350 <0-999> ALL M 350 <0-999> ALL M 350 <0-999> ALL M 350 <0-999> ALL M 125 <0-999> ALL M 125 <0-999> ALL M 125 <0-999> ALL M 125 <0-999> ALL M 979 <0-999> ALL M 979 <0-999> ALL M 979 <0-999> ALL M 990 <0-999> ALL M -6 <-999-999> ALL M -6 <-999-999> ALL M -6 <-999-999> ALL M -4 <-999-999> ALL M 58 <0-999> ALL M 58 <0-999> ALL M 58 <0-999> ALL M 60 <0-999> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 70 Contents Procedure Sets the upper limit value of the laser power at the image quality control. (Unit: µW) 4 4 4 4 Sets the lower limit value of the laser power at the image quality control. (Unit: µW) 4 4 4 4 Displays the background voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) 10 10 10 10 Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum surface potential to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control. 10 10 10 10 Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum surface potential to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control. 10 10 10 10 Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum exposure voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control. 10 10 10 10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code 1808-0 Classification Default Func- Items Y ALL M ALL C ALL K ALL Y ALL M ALL C ALL K ALL Y ALL M ALL C ALL K ALL Y ALL M ALL 1811-2 C ALL 1811-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 1812-2 C ALL 1812-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 1813-2 C ALL 1813-3 K ALL 1808-1 1808-2 Image Drum exposure control voltage characteristic/offset factor display (main charger grid low voltage area) 1808-3 1809-0 1809-1 1809-2 Image Drum exposure control voltage characteristic/slope factor display (main charger grid high voltage area) 1809-3 1810-0 1810-1 1810-2 Image Drum exposure control voltage characteristic/offset factor display (main charger grid high voltage area) 1810-3 1811-0 1811-1 1812-0 1812-1 1813-0 1813-1 Image Contrast voltage/ control upper limit actual value display Image Contrast voltage/ control lower limit actual value display Image Display of control background voltage/upper limit actual value November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 35 <-999-999> 35 <-999-999> 35 <-999-999> 42 <-999-999> 49 <0-999> 49 <0-999> 49 <0-999> 53 <0-999> 41 <-999-999> 41 <-999-999> 41 <-999-999> 47 <-999-999> 500 <0-999> 500 <0-999> 500 <0-999> 600 <0-999> 120 <0-999> 120 <0-999> 120 <0-999> 120 <0-999> 170 <0-999> 170 <0-999> 170 <0-999> 170 <0-999> M M Contents Procedure Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum exposure voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control. 10 10 M 10 M 10 M M Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum exposure voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control. 10 10 M 10 M 10 M M Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum exposure voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control. 10 10 M 10 M 10 M M Displays the upper limit value of the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) 10 10 M 10 M 10 M M Displays the lower limit value of the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) 10 10 M 10 M 10 M M Displays the upper limit value of the background voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) 10 10 M 10 M 10 2 - 71 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification 1814-0 Image control Default Func- Items Y ALL M ALL 1814-2 C ALL 1814-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 1815-2 C ALL 1815-3 K ALL Y ALL M ALL 1816-2 C ALL 1816-3 K ALL 1814-1 1815-0 Image control 1815-1 1816-0 Image control 1816-1 Background voltage/lower limit actual value display Contrast voltage/ correction number of time display Laser power correction/number of time display 80 <0-999> 80 <0-999> 80 <0-999> 80 <0-999> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 92 <0-255> M M 10 M M Displays the actual number of time the contrast voltage has been corrected at the closed-loop control. 10 10 M 10 M 10 M M Displays the actual number of time the laser power has been corrected at the closed-loop control. 10 10 M 10 M 10 PPC (black) 1819 Image control Image control Laser power correcting factor Laser power actual value display PPC 100 (black) <100-255> PRT 92 (black) <0-255> M Image Laser power correcting PRT 100 control factor (black) <100-255> 1822-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller Plain ALL 100 paper <0-255> bias correction of 1822-1 ALL Thick 88 trailing edge of paper 1 <0-255> paper 1822-2 ALL Thick 90 paper 2 <0-255> 1822-3 ALL Thick 90 paper 3 <0-255> 1822-4 OHP film ALL 90 <0-255> M 04/05 10 M Laser power actual value display e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 72 10 10 Image control 1821 Displays the lower limit value of the background voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) Procedure M 1817 1820 Contents M M M M Displays the laser power value when copying in the Black Mode. (Bit value) Perform the correction of the setting 05-1817. (Unit: %) Displays the laser power value when printing in the Black Mode. (Bit value) Perform the correction of the setting 05-1820. (Unit: %) Corrects the 2nd transfer roller bias output of the trailing edge of paper (05-227, 229, 230, 231 and 232). Correction factor: % 2 1 2 1 14 14 M 14 M 14 M 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification Items Default Func- ALL 1823-0 Transfer Display of Single side (black) intermediate level 1823-1 Reverse ALL of 2nd transfer side at (black) roller bias actual duplexing value of trailing 1823-2 ALL Single edge of paper side (color) (Plain paper) 1823-3 Reverse ALL side at (color) duplexing 1825-0 Transfer Display of ALL Single side (black) intermediate level 1825-1 Reverse ALL of 2nd transfer side at (black) roller bias actual duplexing value of trailing 1825-2 ALL Single edge of paper side (color) (Thick paper 1) 1825-3 Reverse ALL side at (color) duplexing 1826-0 Transfer Display of intermediate level ALL (black) of 2nd transfer roller bias 1826-1 ALL actual value of trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 2) (color) 1827-0 Transfer Display of intermediate level ALL (black) of 2nd transfer roller bias 1827-1 ALL actual value of trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 3) (color) 1828-0 Transfer Display of intermediate level ALL (black) of 2nd transfer roller bias 1828-1 ALL actual value of trailing edge of paper (OHP film) (color) 1829-0 Transfer 1st transfer roller Thick ALL paper 2 bias correction at 1829-1 ALL Thick deceleration paper 3 1829-2 ALL OHP film 1831 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual ALL value display at deceleration (black) (Thick paper 2) 1832 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual ALL value display at deceleration (black) (Thick paper 3) 1833 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual ALL value display at deceleration (black) (OHP film) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Contents Procedure Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. (The value corrected in 05-1822 is displayed.) 10 145 <0-255> 120 <0-255> M 139 <0-255> 118 <0-255> M 10 M 10 138 <0-255> 112 <0-255> M 10 M 10 123 <0-255> 112 <0-255> M 10 M 10 145 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 145 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 118 <0-255> 112 <0-255> 40 <0-100> 60 <0-100> 40 <0-100> 190 <0-255> M 180 <0-255> M 200 <0-255> M M M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. (The value corrected in 05-1822 is displayed.) 10 10 10 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M M Corrects the 1st transfer roller bias output. Correction factor: % M M 14 14 14 Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias at deceleration when the actual printing is operated. (The value corrected in 05-1829 is displayed.) 2 2 2 2 - 73 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Code Classification 1834 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output ALL adjustment in low-speed (color) color printing (Plain paper / Thick paper 1) 175 <0-255> M 1835 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias ALL offsetting in low-speed color (color) printing (Plain paper / Thick paper 1) 5 <0-10> M 1836 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual ALL value display in low-speed (color) color printing (Plain paper / Thick paper 1) 175 <0-255> M 1837 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output ALL adjustment (black) (Tab paper) 135 <0-225> M 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 100 <0-100> M 90 <0-100> M Items 1838-0 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output 1838-1 adjustment (Tab paper) 1838-2 ALL (color) M ALL (color) C ALL (color) 1838-3 K ALL (color) 1839-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller Intermedi- ALL bias correction of ate level bias of leading/trailing trailing edge of paper edge (Tab paper) 1839-1 ALL Bias of leading/ trailing edge Y e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 74 04/10 M M Contents Procedure Adjusts the output value of the 1st transfer roller bias when the transfers of all colors (Y, M, C and K) have finished. When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. This adjustment is valid only when the value of the code 08-497 is “1” (6 pages/minute). Sets the offset amount of the 1st transfer roller bias when the transfers of all colors (Y, M, C and K) have finished. This adjustment is valid only when the value of the code 08-497 is “1” (6 pages/minute). 0: -500 V 1: -400 V 2: -300 V 3: -200 V 4: -100 V 5: 0 V 6: +100 V 7: +200 V 8: +300 V 9: +400 V 10: +500 V Displays the actual value of the 1st transfer roller bias when the transfers of all colors (Y, M, C and K) have finished. This adjustment is valid only when the value of the code 08-497 is “1” (6 pages/minute). As the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases correspondingly. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). As the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases correspondingly. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). 1 M M 1 2 3 14 14 14 14 Corrects the 2nd transfer roller bias output of leading/trailing edge of paper (05-1840). (Correcting factor: %) 14 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Adjustment mode (05) Code Classification Default Func- Items Contents Procedure As the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases correspondingly. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). Sets the offset amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias on the leading/trailing edge of paper when printing is performed. (The value corrected in 05-1839 is displayed.) 14 1840-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (Tab paper) 1840-1 143 ALL (black) <0-158> M ALL (color) 137 <0-158> M 1841-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Tab paper) 1841-1 ALL (black) 5 <0-10> M ALL (color) 5 <0-10> M 1842-0 Transfer Actual value Intermedisplay of 2nd diate transfer roller bias level bias of leading/trailing of trailing edge edge of paper 1842-1 Bias of (Tab paper) leading/ trailing edge 1842-2 Intermediate level bias of trailing edge 1842-3 Bias of leading/ trailing edge 1843 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Tab paper) 1844-0 Transfer 1st transfer roller Y bias actual value 1844-1 M display (Tab paper) 1844-2 C ALL 143 (black) <0-225> M ALL 145 (black) <0-225> M 10 ALL (color) 137 <0-225> M 10 ALL (color) 140 <0-225> M 10 ALL 135 (black) <0-225> M Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 2 ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) M Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 10 1844-3 1845-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias actual value display 1845-1 (Tab paper) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC K 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 14 4 4 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. 10 10 2 - 75 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/10 2.2.5 Setting mode (08) The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08). Procedure 1 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Sets or changes value [START] ( ) [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-). Procedure 2 [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] ( [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit) ) Procedure 3 [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [ENTER] or [START] [Digital key] [INTERRUPT] * [FUNCTION CLEAR] (Stores value Sets or in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) * Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-). Procedure 5 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [ENTER] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON or *[HELP] (Exit) [INTERRUPT] Sets or (Stores value in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [HELP] to enter - . ( ) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 76 04/05 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] (Setting) [START] [ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) Procedure 9 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Select button] [START] [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) Procedure 10 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (1st setting) [START] [ENTER] [POWER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) [Digital key] (2nd setting) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) Procedure 11 and 12 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] or [POWER] OFF/ON [ENTER] [START] [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit) *1 [MONITOR/PAUSE] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) ( ) *1. Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number. *2. The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12. Procedure 14 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [START] [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) Adjustment value cannot be changed [CLEAR] (Corrects value) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 77 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. 2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M” stands for the LGC board, “SYS” and “UTY” stands for the SYS board and “NIC” stands for the NIC board. Setting mode (08) 200 ClassifiItems cation General Date and time setting 201 General Destination selection 202 User Counter installed externally interface 203 General Line adjustment mode 204 User Auto-clear timer setting interface 205 User Auto power save mode timer interface setting 206 User Auto Shut Off Mode timer interface setting (Sleep Mode) Code Default Func- ALL - Year/month/date/day/hour/minute/ 5 <13 digits> second Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 “Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from “1” to “6”. ALL EUR: 0 M 0: EUR 1: UC 1 UC: 1 2: JPN 3: Other JPN: 2 <0-3> ALL M 0: No external counter 1 0 1: Coin controller <0-4> 2: Copy key card 3: Key copy counter 4: Key card for OEM1 ALL 0 M 0: For factory shipment 1: For line 1 <0-1> *Field: “0” must be selected ALL SYS Timer to return the equipment to the 1 3 <0-10> default settings when the [START] button is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number x 15 sec. ALL 11 SYS Timer to automatically switch to the 1 <0, 6-15> energy saving mode when the equipment has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min. ALL Refer to SYS Timer to enter the Sleep Mode 1 content automatically when the equipment <0-20> has not been used 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min. 11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17: 180min. 18: 210min. 19: 240min. 20: Not used e-STUDIO3511: 9 e-STUDIO4511: 12 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 78 04/09 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 207 209 210 216 217 218 219 220 ClassifiItems cation User Highlighting display on LCD interface User Default setting of filing interface format when E-mailing (common in all color modes) Paper Paper size (A6-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Tab paper print feeding Tab width setting (Bypass feeding) Paper Tab paper print feeding Shift width setting (Bypass feeding) User Default setting of filing interface format when storing files (at color/ACS modes) User Default setting of filing interface format when storing files (at black mode) User Language displayed at interface power-ON Default Func- ALL 0 SYS 0: Black letter on white background <0-1> 1: White letter on black background ALL SYS 0:TIFF (Multi) 0 1:PDF (color) <0-1> PRT ALL ALL 1 148/105 M <148-432/ 105-297> SYS 130 <100-200> 10 1300 SYS <0-3000> 1 1 1 <0-3> SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 3:TIFF (Single) 1: PDF 2: JPG 1 ALL (black) 0 <0-3> SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 3:TIFF (Single) 1: PDF 1 ALL EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6> EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6> 0 <0-1> User Language selection in UI interface data at Web power ON ALL 223 Mainte- Switching of output pages/ nance driving counts at PM ALL 224 Paper Paper size for bypass feed feeding Paper Paper size for upper drawer feeding PPC 226 Paper Paper size for lower drawer feeding ALL 227 Paper Paper size for PFP upper feeding drawer ALL 228 Paper Paper size for PFP lower feeding drawer ALL 229 Paper Paper size (A3) feeding feeding/widthwise direction ALL November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 1 SCN (color) 221 225 Procedure ALL 2: JPG SYS 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 SYS 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The message is displayed on the LCD screen.) 0: PM counter (The number of output pages is set at 08-251.) 1: PM time counter (The timing is set at 08-375.) UNDEF SYS Press the button on the LCD to select the size. EUR:A4 M Press the button on the LCD to UC:LT select the size. JPN:A4 EUR:A3 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. UC:LD JPN:A3 EUR: A4-R M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R EUR:A4 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. UC:LG JPN:B4 M 420/297 <182-432/ 140-297> 1 1 1 9 9 9 9 9 10 2 - 79 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/09 Setting mode (08) Code 230 ClassifiItems cation Paper Paper size (A4-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 231 Paper Paper size (A5-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 232 Paper Paper size (B4) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 233 Paper Paper size (B5-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 234 Paper Paper size (LT-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 235 Paper Paper size (LD) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 236 Paper Paper size (LG) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 237 Paper Paper size (ST-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 238 Paper Paper size (COMPUTER) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 239 Paper Paper size (FOLIO) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 240 Paper Paper size (13”LG) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 241 Paper Paper size (8.5”X8.5”) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 242 Paper Paper size (Non-standard) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 243 Paper Memory 1 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (8K) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 244 Default Func- ALL 297/210 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 210/148 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 364/257 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 257/182 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 279/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 432/279 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 356/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 216/140 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 356/257 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 330/210 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 330/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 216/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 432/279 SYS <148-432/ 105-297> ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into <148-432/ [MEMORY 1]. 100-297> ALL 245 Paper Paper size (16K-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction ALL 246 Paper Paper size (A3-wide) feeding feeding/widthwise direction ALL 390/270 <182-432/ 140-297> 270/195 <182-432/ 140-297> 457/305 <182-457/ 140-305> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 80 04/09 Procedure 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 M 10 M 10 M 10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification Items Default Func- Contents Procedure Paper Memory 2 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 3 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 4 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Mainte- Service technician nance telephone number ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into <148-432/ [MEMORY 2]. 100-297> 10 ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass <148-432/ feed (non-standard type) into 100-297> [MEMORY 3]. 10 ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass <148-432/ feed (non-standard type) into 100-297> [MEMORY 4]. 10 ALL 11 251 Mainte- Setting value of PM counter nance ALL 252 Mainte- Current value of PM counter nance Display/0 clearing Mainte- Error history display nance Paper LT ↔ A4/LD ↔ A3 feeding ALL 0 SYS A telephone number can be entered <32 digits> up to 32 digits. Use the [MONITOR/ PAUSE] button to enter a hyphen(-). Refer to M content e-STUDIO3511 <8 digits> UC, EUR: 120000 JPN: 0 e-STUDIO4511 UC, EUR: 150000 JPN: 0 0 M Counts up when the registration <8 digits> sensor is ON. SYS Displays the latest 20 errors data - 247 248 249 250 253 254 ALL PRT 255 Paper PFP/LCF installation feeding ALL 256 Paper Paper size setting /LCF feeding ALL 257 Counter Counter copy ALL 258 Mainte- FSMS acceptance nance ALL 259 Network Storage period at trail and private PRT November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 0 <0-1> SYS Sets whether the data is printed on the different but similar size paper or not when the paper of corresponding size is not available. 0: Valid (The data is printed on A4/A3 when LT/LD is selected or vice versa.) 1: Invalid (The message to use the selected paper size is displayed.) 0 M 0: Automatic <0-4> 1: PFP single-drawer type installed 2: PFP dual-drawer type installed 3: LCF installed 4: Not installed EUR:A4 M Press the icon on the LCD to select UC:LT the size. JPN:A4 - 1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter 2: Backup counter -> Electrical counter <1-2> ( Page 2-153) 1 SYS Sets whether the FSMS connection <0-2> is accepted or not. 0: Prohibited 1: Accepted (serial connection only) 2: Accepted (both serial and USB connections) 14 SYS 0: No limits 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days <0-30> 1 1 2 1 1 9 - 1 1 2 - 81 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/10 Setting mode (08) Code Classification Items Default Func- 260 Network Web data retention period ALL 261 Network Web data in Electronic Filing retention period ALL 262 Network TWAIN data retention period ALL 263 User Administrator's password interface (Maximum 10 digits) ALL 264 Network File retention period ALL 265 Network Maximum data capacity at E-mailing Network Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX Electronic Full guarantee of documents filing in Electronic Filing when HDD is full ALL 268 User Binarizing level selection interface (When judging as black in the ACS Mode) ALL 270 Electronic Default setting of user box filing retention period ALL 271 General Warning display of the HDD capacity to be filled ALL 266 267 ALL ALL Contents 10 SYS When a certain period of time has <3 digits> passed without operation after accessing TopAccess, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) 10 SYS When a certain period of time has <3 digits> passed without operation after accessing Electronic Filing, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) 10 SYS When a certain period of time has <3 digits> passed without operation after accessing TWAIN and File Downloader, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) 123456 - The password can be entered in <10 digits> alphabets and figures (A-Z, a-z, 0-9) within 10 digits. 30 SYS 0: No limits <0-999> 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 30 <2-30> SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 30 <2-30> SYS Sets the file retention level when 0 editing the files in the Electronic <0-1> Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution). 0: Not full retained 1: Fully retained - Retains the source file until CutDoc/ SaveDoc command is completed. * The file is not deleted even if the HDD has become full during the execution of command when “1” is set. 3 SYS 0: Step -2 1: Step -1 <1-5> 2: Step 0 (center) 3: Step 1 4: Step 2 * The binarizing level of each step is set at 08-609. 0 SYS Sets the data retention period when <0-999> creating a user box. 0: Not deleted 1 to 999: Retention period (Unit: Day) 90 SYS Sets the percentage of the HDD <0-100> capacity filled which warning is displayed 0 to 100: 0 to 100 % e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 82 05/05 Procedure 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification Items Default Func- 272 Scanning Notification setting of E-mail saving time limit ALL 3 <0-99> 273 Scanning Default setting of partial size when transmitting E-mail ALL 0 <0-6> Default setting of page by page when transmitting Internet FAX ALL 0 <0-4> Default setting of encode method User Default setting of density interface adjustment (Black) FAX SCN (black) 0 <0-3> 0 <0-11> SCN (color) 3 <1-5> SCN 0 <0-4> 2 <0-3> 2 <0-4> 1 <0-4> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-3> 0 <0-22> 274 FAX 275 FAX 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 User Default setting of interface background adjustment (Full Color) User Default setting of color interface mode User Default setting of resolution interface (Full Color) User Default setting of resolution interface (Gray Scale) User Default setting of resolution interface (Black) User Default setting of original interface mode (Full Color) User Default setting of original interface mode (Black) User Default setting of scanning interface mode User Default setting of rotation interface mode User Default setting of original interface paper size November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC SCN (color) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (color) SCN (black) SCN SCN ALL Procedure Contents SYS Sets the days left the notification of E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days SYS Sets the default value for the partial size of E-mail to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 (Unit: KB) SYS Sets the default value for the page by page of Internet FAX to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 256 2: 512 3: 1024 4: 2048 (Unit: KB) SYS 0: MH 1: MR 2: MMR 3: JBIG 1 1 1 1 SYS 0: Automatic density 1: Step -5 2: Step -4 3: Step -3 4: Step -2 5: Step -1 6: Step 0 (center) 7: Step +1 8: Step +2 9: Step +3 10: Step +4 11: Step +5 (1 to 11: Manual density) SYS 1: Step -2 2: Step -1 3: Step 0 (center) 4: Step +1 5: Step +2 SYS 0: Black 1: Gray Scale 2: Unused 3: Full Color 4: Auto Color SYS 0: 100 dpi 1: 150 dpi 2: 200 dpi 3: 300dpi SYS 0: 100 dpi 1: 150 dpi 2: 200 dpi 3: 300dpi 4: 400 dpi SYS 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi 3: 400dpi 4: 600 dpi SYS 0: Text 1: Photo 2: Printed Image 1 SYS 0: Text 2: Photo 1 2: Tablet 1 1: Text/Photo SYS 0: Single 1: Book SYS 0: 0 degree 1: 90 degrees 2: 180 degrees 3: 270 degrees SYS 0: Automatic 1: A3 2: A4 3: LD 4: LT 5: A4-R 6: A5-R 7: LT-R 8: LG 9: B4 10: B5 11: ST-R 12: COMP 13: B5-R 14: FOLIO 15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5" 18: A6-R 19: Size mixed 20: 8K 21: 16K 22: 16K-R 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 83 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Setting mode (08) Code Classification Default Func- Items 288 General Searching interval of deleting expired files ALL 12 <1-24> 289 User Default setting of backinterface ground adjustment (Gray Scale) Network Raw printing job (Duplex) ALL 3 <1-5> PRT 1 <0-1> EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6 <0 -13> 0 <0-4> 290 291 Network Raw printing job (Paper size) PRT 292 Network Raw printing job (Paper type) PRT 293 PRT 294 Network Raw printing job (Paper direction) Network Raw printing job (Staple) 295 Network Raw printing job (Exit tray) PRT 296 Network Raw printing job (Number of form lines) PRT 297 Network Raw printing job (PCL font pitch) PRT 298 Network Raw printing job (PCL font size) PRT 299 Network Raw printing job (PCL font number) 300 User Maximum number of copy interface volume (MAX9) A3 301-0 Counter Number of output pages at Full 301-1 Counter Color Mode in A4 Copier Function 301-2 Counter A5 301-3 Counter A6 301-4 Counter B4 301-5 Counter B5 301-6 Counter FOLIO 301-7 Counter LD PRT PRT PPC PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-2> 1200 <50012800> Contents SYS Sets the search interval of expired files. Deletes if expired file is found. (Unit: Hour) SYS 1: Step -2 2: Step -1 3: Step 0 (center) 4: Step +1 5: Step +2 SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid 1 SYS 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMP 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13 "LG 13: 8.5" x 8.5" SYS 0: Plain paper 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film SYS 0: Portrait 1: Landscape 1 SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid 1 SYS 0: Inner tray 1: Finisher tray 1 2: Finisher tray 2 SYS Sets the number of form lines from 5 to 128. (A hundredfold of the number of form lines is defined as the setting value.) 1000 SYS Sets the font pitch from 0.44 to <44-9999> 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value.) 1200 SYS Sets the font size from 4 to 999.75. <400(A hundredfold of the font size is 99975> defined as the setting value.) SYS Sets the PCL font number. 0 <0-79> SYS 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9 0 <0-2> SYS Counts the output pages at the Full 0 <8 digits> Color Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the 0 <8 digits> setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the 0 <8 digits> definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 84 Procedure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) ClassifiItems cation 301-8 Counter Number of output pages at Full 301-9 Counter Color Mode in Copier Function 301-10 Counter Code 301-11 Counter 301-12 Counter 301-13 Counter 301-14 Counter 301-15 Counter 301-16 Counter 302 User interface Function LG PPC (color) LT PPC (color) ST PPC (color) COMP PPC (color) 13"LG PPC (color) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (color) 16K PPC (color) 8K PPC (color) Others PPC (color) Original counter display PPC A3 303-2 Counter Number of output pages at Full Counter Color Mode in Printer Function Counter 303-3 Counter A6 303-4 Counter B4 303-5 Counter B5 303-6 Counter FOLIO 303-7 Counter LD 303-8 Counter LG 303-9 Counter LT 303-10 Counter ST 303-11 Counter COMP 303-12 Counter 13"LG 303-0 303-1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC A4 A5 PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) Default Contents Procedure RAM 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 0 <0, 2> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> SYS Counts the output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 2: Displayed 1 SYS Counts the output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 - 85 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Setting mode (08) Code Classification 303-13 Counter 303-14 Counter 303-15 Counter 303-16 Counter 304-0 Counter 304-1 Counter 304-2 Counter 304-3 Counter 304-4 Counter 304-5 Counter 304-6 Counter 304-7 Counter 304-8 Counter 304-9 Counter 304-10 Counter 304-11 Counter 304-12 Counter 304-13 Counter 304-14 Counter 304-15 Counter 304-16 Counter 305-0 Counter 305-1 Counter 305-2 Counter 305-3 Counter 305-4 Counter Function Number of output 8.5"x8.5" PRT (color) pages at Full 16K PRT Color Mode in (color) Printer Function 8K PRT (color) Others PRT (color) Number of output A3 PPC (color) pages at Twin A4 PPC Color Mode in (color) Copier Function A5 PPC (color) A6 PPC (color) B4 PPC (color) B5 PPC (color) FOLIO PPC (color) LD PPC (color) LG PPC (color) LT PPC (color) ST PPC (color) COMP PPC (color) 13"LG PPC (color) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (color) 16K PPC (color) 8K PPC (color) Others PPC (color) Number of output A3 PPC (black) pages at Black A4 PPC Mode in Copier (black) Function A5 PPC (black) A6 PPC (black) B4 PPC (black) Items Default RAM 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> SYS Counts the output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS Counts the output pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 86 Contents Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification 305-5 Counter 305-6 Counter 305-7 Counter 305-8 Counter 305-9 Counter 305-10 Counter 305-11 Counter 305-12 Counter 305-13 Counter 305-14 Counter 305-15 Counter 305-16 Counter 306-0 Counter 306-1 Counter 306-2 Counter 306-3 Counter 306-4 Counter 306-5 Counter 306-6 Counter 306-7 Counter 306-8 Counter 306-9 Counter 306-10 Counter 306-11 Counter 306-12 Counter Function Number of output PPC B5 (black) pages at Black FOLIO PPC Mode in Copier (black) Function LD PPC (black) LG PPC (black) LT PPC (black) ST PPC (black) COMP PPC (black) 13"LG PPC (black) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (black) 16K PPC (black) 8K PPC (black) Others PPC (black) Number of output A3 PRT (black) pages at Black A4 PRT Mode in Printer (black) Function A5 PRT (black) A6 PRT (black) B4 PRT (black) B5 PRT (black) FOLIO PRT (black) LD PRT (black) LG PRT (black) LT PRT (black) ST PRT (black) COMP PRT (black) 13"LG PRT (black) Items November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default Contents Procedure RAM 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> SYS Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Printer Function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 - 87 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Code Classification 306-13 Counter 306-14 Counter 306-15 Counter 306-16 Counter 307-0 Counter 307-1 Counter 307-2 Counter 307-3 Counter 307-4 Counter 307-5 Counter 307-6 Counter 307-7 Counter 307-8 Counter 307-9 Counter 307-10 Counter 307-11 Counter 307-12 Counter 307-13 Counter 307-14 Counter 307-15 Counter 307-16 Counter Function Number of output 8.5"x8.5" PRT (black) pages at Black 16K PRT Mode in Printer (black) Function 8K PRT (black) Others PRT (black) Number of output A3 PRT (black) pages at List Print A4 PRT Mode (black) A5 PRT (black) A6 PRT (black) B4 PRT (black) B5 PRT (black) FOLIO PRT (black) LD PRT (black) LG PRT (black) LT PRT (black) ST PRT (black) COMP PRT (black) 13"LG PRT (black) 8.5"x8.5" PRT (black) 16K PRT (black) 8K PRT (black) Others PRT (black) Number of output A3 FAX pages in FAX A4 Function FAX Items 308-0 Counter 308-1 Counter 308-2 Counter A5 FAX 308-3 Counter A6 FAX 308-4 Counter B4 FAX Default RAM 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> SYS Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Printer Function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS Counts the output pages at the List Print Mode for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the output pages in the FAX Function for each paper size accordSYS ing to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the SYS definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 88 Contents Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification 308-5 308-6 Counter Number of output pages in FAX Counter Function 308-7 Default Func- Items B5 FAX FOLIO FAX Counter LD FAX 308-8 Counter LG FAX 308-9 Counter LT FAX 308-10 Counter ST FAX 308-11 Counter COMP FAX 308-12 Counter 13"LG FAX 308-13 Counter 8.5"x8.5" FAX 308-14 Counter 16K FAX 308-15 Counter 8K FAX 308-16 Counter Others FAX A3 309-2 Counter Number of scanning pages at Counter Full Color Mode in Copier Function Counter 309-3 Counter A6 309-4 Counter B4 309-5 Counter B5 309-6 Counter FOLIO 309-7 Counter LD 309-8 Counter LG 309-9 Counter LT 309-10 Counter ST 309-11 Counter COMP 309-12 Counter 13"LG PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 309-0 309-1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC A4 A5 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> Contents Procedure SYS Counts the output pages in the FAX Function for each paper size accordSYS ing to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the SYS definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 - 89 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Code Classification Items Default Func- 8.5"x8.5" PPC 0 309-13 Counter Number of (color) <8 digits> scanning pages at 16K PPC 0 309-14 Counter Full Color Mode in (color) <8 digits> Copier Function 8K PPC 0 309-15 Counter (color) <8 digits> Others PPC 0 309-16 Counter (color) <8 digits> A3 SCN 0 310-0 Counter Number of (color) <8 digits> scanning pages at A4 SCN 0 310-1 Counter Full Color Mode in (color) <8 digits> Scanning Function A5 SCN 0 310-2 Counter (color) <8 digits> A6 SCN 0 310-3 Counter (color) <8 digits> B4 SCN 0 310-4 Counter (color) <8 digits> B5 SCN 0 310-5 Counter (color) <8 digits> FOLIO SCN 0 310-6 Counter (color) <8 digits> LD SCN 0 310-7 Counter (color) <8 digits> LG SCN 0 310-8 Counter (color) <8 digits> LT SCN 0 310-9 Counter (color) <8 digits> ST SCN 0 310-10 Counter (color) <8 digits> COMP SCN 0 310-11 Counter (color) <8 digits> 13"LG SCN 0 310-12 Counter (color) <8 digits> 8.5"x8.5" SCN 0 310-13 Counter (color) <8 digits> 16K SCN 0 310-14 Counter (color) <8 digits> 8K SCN 0 310-15 Counter (color) <8 digits> Others SCN 0 310-16 Counter (color) <8 digits> A3 PPC 0 311-0 Counter Number of (color) <8 digits> scanning pages at A4 PPC 0 311-1 Counter Twin Color Mode (color) <8 digits> in Copier Function A5 PPC 0 311-2 Counter (color) <8 digits> A6 PPC 0 311-3 Counter (color) <8 digits> B4 PPC 0 311-4 Counter (color) <8 digits> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 90 Contents Procedure SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Scanning SYS Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting SYS of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier SYS Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting SYS of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification 311-5 Counter 311-6 Counter 311-7 Counter 311-8 Counter 311-9 Counter 311-10 Counter 311-11 Counter 311-12 Counter 311-13 Counter 311-14 Counter 311-15 Counter 311-16 Counter 312-0 Counter 312-1 Counter 312-2 Counter 312-3 Counter 312-4 Counter 312-5 Counter 312-6 Counter 312-7 Counter 312-8 Counter 312-9 Counter 312-10 Counter 312-11 Counter 312-12 Counter Function PPC B5 Number of (color) scanning pages at FOLIO PPC Twin Color Mode (color) in Copier Function LD PPC (color) LG PPC (color) PPC LT (color) PPC ST (color) PPC COMP (color) PPC 13"LG (color) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (color) PPC 16K (color) PPC 8K (color) PPC Others (color) Number of PPC A3 (black) scanning pages at PPC Black Mode in A4 (black) Copier Function PPC A5 (black) PPC A6 (black) PPC B4 (black) PPC B5 (black) PPC FOLIO (black) PPC LD (black) PPC LG (black) PPC LT (black) PPC ST (black) PPC COMP (black) PPC 13"LG (black) Items November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default Contents Procedure RAM 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier SYS Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting SYS of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 - 91 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Code Classification 312-13 Counter 312-14 Counter 312-15 Counter 312-16 Counter 313-0 Counter 313-1 Counter 313-2 Counter 313-3 Counter 313-4 Counter 313-5 Counter 313-6 Counter 313-7 Counter 313-8 Counter 313-9 Counter 313-10 Counter 313-11 Counter 313-12 Counter 313-13 Counter 313-14 Counter 313-15 Counter 313-16 Counter Function Number of 8.5"x8.5" PPC (black) scanning pages at PPC Black Mode in 16K (black) Copier Function PPC 8K (black) PPC Others (black) Number of SCN A3 (black) scanning pages in SCN Scanning Function A4 (black) SCN A5 (black) SCN A6 (black) SCN B4 (black) SCN B5 (black) SCN FOLIO (black) SCN LD (black) SCN LG (black) SCN LT (black) SCN ST (black) SCN COMP (black) SCN 13"LG (black) 8.5"x8.5" SCN (black) SCN 16K (black) SCN 8K (black) SCN Others (black) Number of FAX A3 scanning pages in FAX FAX Function A4 Items 314-0 Counter 314-1 Counter 314-2 Counter A5 FAX 314-3 Counter A6 FAX 314-4 Counter B4 FAX Default RAM 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Scanning Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the scanning pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 92 Contents Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification 314-5 314-6 Counter Number of scanning pages in Counter FAX Function 314-7 Default Func- Items B5 FAX FOLIO FAX Counter LD FAX 314-8 Counter LG FAX 314-9 Counter LT FAX 314-10 Counter ST FAX 314-11 Counter COMP FAX 314-12 Counter 13"LG FAX 314-13 Counter 8.5"x8.5" FAX 314-14 Counter 16K FAX 314-15 Counter 8K FAX 314-16 Counter Others FAX A3 FAX 315-1 Counter Number of transmitted pages Counter in FAX Function A4 FAX 315-2 Counter A5 FAX 315-3 Counter A6 FAX 315-4 Counter B4 FAX 315-5 Counter B5 FAX 315-6 Counter FOLIO FAX 315-7 Counter LD FAX 315-8 Counter LG FAX 315-9 Counter LT FAX 315-10 Counter ST FAX 315-11 Counter COMP FAX 315-12 Counter 13"LG FAX 315-0 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> Contents Procedure SYS Counts the scanning pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 - 93 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Code Classification Default Func- Items 315-13 Counter Number of 8.5"x8.5" transmitted pages 315-14 Counter in FAX Function 16K FAX 315-15 Counter 8K FAX 315-16 Counter Others FAX FAX 316-0 Counter A3 FAX 316-1 A4 FAX 316-2 Counter Number of received pages in Counter FAX Function A5 FAX 316-3 Counter A6 FAX 316-4 Counter B4 FAX 316-5 Counter B5 FAX 316-6 Counter FOLIO FAX 316-7 Counter LD FAX 316-8 Counter LG FAX 316-9 Counter LT FAX 316-10 Counter ST FAX 316-11 Counter COMP FAX 316-12 Counter 13"LG FAX 316-13 Counter 8.5"x8.5" FAX 316-14 Counter 16K FAX 316-15 Counter 8K FAX 316-16 Counter Others FAX 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 94 Contents Procedure SYS Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS Counts the received pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 SYS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) ClassifiItems cation 317-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Full Color Mode in Copier Function 317-1 Counter Code Large Small 317-2 Counter Total 318-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Full Color Mode in Printer Function 318-1 Counter Large 318-2 Counter Total 319-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Twin Color Mode in Copier Function 319-1 Counter Large 319-2 Counter Total 320-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Black Mode in Copier Function 320-1 Counter Large 320-2 Counter Total November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Small Small Small Default ProceFunc- PPC 0 14 SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) <8 digits> at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/ small). PPC 0 14 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 14 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) <8 digits> at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function according to its size (large/ small). PRT 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PRT 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 14 PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) <8 digits> at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/ small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 14 PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the Black Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/ small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (black) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (black) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 2 - 95 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) ClassifiItems cation 321-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Black Mode in Printer Function 321-1 Counter Code Large Small Default ProceFunc- PRT 0 14 SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the Black Mode in the Printer Function according to its size (large/ small). PRT 0 14 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (black) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PRT 0 14 than set as large-sized paper SYS (black) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 321-2 Counter Total 322-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at List Print Mode Large 322-1 Counter Small 322-2 Counter Total 323-0 Counter Display of number of output pages in FAX Function Large FAX 323-1 Counter Small FAX 323-2 Counter Total FAX 324-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at Full Color Mode in Copier 324-1 Counter Function Large 324-2 Counter Total Small PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the List Print Mode Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of PRT 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper PRT 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes. 14 14 14 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages <8 digits> in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of <8 digits> all paper sizes. 14 PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 14 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 96 14 14 14 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) ClassifiItems cation 325-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at Full Color Mode in Scanning 325-1 Counter Function Code Large Small Default ProceFunc- SCN 0 14 SYS Counts the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the Full Color Mode in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). SCN 0 14 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other SCN 0 14 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 325-2 Counter Total 326-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at Twin Color Mode in Copier 326-1 Counter Function Large 326-2 Counter Total 327-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at Black Mode in Copier Function 327-1 Counter Large 327-2 Counter Total 328-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages in FAX Function Large FAX 328-1 Counter Small FAX 328-2 Counter Total FAX November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Small Small PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 14 PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of scanning (black) <8 digits> pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (black) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (black) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 14 0 SYS Counts the number of scanning <8 digits> pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of <8 digits> all paper sizes. 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 2 - 97 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) ClassifiItems cation 329-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages in Scanning Function 329-1 Counter Code Large Small Default ProceFunc- 0 SCN 14 SYS Counts the number of scanning (black) <8 digits> pages in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of SCN 0 14 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper SCN 0 14 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes. 329-2 Counter Total 330-0 Counter Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX Function 330-1 Counter Large FAX Small FAX 330-2 Counter Total FAX 331 User Default setting of screen interface ALL 332-0 Counter Display of number of received pages in FAX Function Large FAX 332-1 Counter Small FAX 332-2 Counter Total FAX Large 333-1 Counter Display of total number of pages Counter at Full Color Mode 333-2 Counter Total 333-0 Small 0 SYS Counts the number of transmitted <8 digits> pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of <8 digits> all paper sizes. 0 <0-3> SYS Sets the screen to be displayed after the auto-clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode. 0: Copier 1: Fax 2: Scan 3: Box 0 SYS Counts the number of received <8 digits> pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of <8 digits> all paper sizes. ALL 0 SYS Displays the total number of pages at (color) <8 digits> Full Color Mode in the Copier/Printer/ ALL 0 SYS Scanning Functions. (color) <8 digits> ALL 0 SYS (color) <8 digits> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 98 14 14 14 1 14 14 14 14 14 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 334-0 334-1 334-2 ClassifiItems cation Counter Display of total number of pages Counter at Twin Color Mode Counter Large Small Total Large 335-1 Counter Display of total number of pages Counter at Black Mode 335-2 Counter Total 335-0 Small Function ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL 358 Counter Count setting of tab paper (PM) Counter Count setting of large-sized paper (PM) Counter Definition setting of largesized paper (PM) Counter Count setting of thick paper (PM) Counter Count setting of OHP film (PM) Counter Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter Counter for upper drawer feeding Counter Counter for lower drawer feeding Counter Counter for bypass feeding 359 Counter Counter for LCF feeding ALL 360 ALL 372 Counter Counter for PFP upper drawer feeding Counter Counter for PFP lower drawer feeding Counter Counter for ADU 374 Counter Counter for RADF ALL 375 Mainte- Setting value of PM time nance counter display/0 clearing ALL 376 Mainte- Current value of PM time nance counter ALL 344 346 347 348 349 352 353 356 357 370 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Default Contents Procedure RAM 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> JPN: 0 OTHER: 1 <0-2> 0 <0-1> SYS Displays the total number of pages at Twin Color Mode in the Copier SYS Function. 14 SYS 14 SYS Displays the total number of pages at Black Mode in the Copier/Printer/ SYS Scanning/FAX Functions. 14 SYS 14 14 14 1 M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 1 M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 2: Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter is double counter) 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP/8K 1 M M M M 0 M Counts the number of sheets fed <8 digits> from upper drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from lower drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from bypass feed M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from LCF M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from PFP upper drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from PFP lower drawer M Counts the number of output pages 0 <8 digits> of duplex printing. SYS Counts the number of originals fed 0 <8 digits> from RADF M Refer to content e-STUDIO3511 <8 digits> JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 315,000 e-STUDIO4511 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 315,000 0 M Counts the drum driving time (main <8 digits> motor ON). 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 - 99 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/10 Setting mode (08) Code 381 390 391 392 393 398 ClassifiItems cation Counter Setting for counter installed externally Counter Number of errors in HDD (Copying) Counter Number of errors in HDD (FAX) Counter Number of errors in HDD (Scanning) Counter Number of errors in HDD (Printer) Laser Number of polygonal motor rotational speed switching 399 Laser Accumulated time of polygonal motor at normal rotation Fuser unit error status counter 400 Fuser 409 Fuser Fuser roller temperature at a energy saver mode (Center thermistor) 410-0 Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Plain paper) 410-1 411 Fuser Fuser roller temperature on standby (Center thermistor) Default ProceFunc- 1 ALL 1 M Selects the job to count up for the <0-7> external counter. 0: Not selected 1: Copier 2: FAX 3: Copier/FAX 4: Printer 5: Copier/Printer 6: Printer/FAX 7: Copier/Printer/FAX PPC 0 SYS The number of error is reset at HDD 2 <8 digits> formatting. FAX SYS 2 0 <8 digits> SCN SYS 2 0 <8 digits> PRT SYS 2 0 <8 digits> ALL M Counts the number of time the 2 0 polygonal motor has switched its <8 digits> rotational speed between normal rotation and standby rotation. ALL 0 M Accumulates the time the polygonal 2 <8 digits> motor has rotated at normal rotation. ALL 0 <0-19> M ALL 13 <0-16> M ALL (black) 12 <0-16> M ALL (color) 12 <0-16> M ALL 12 <0-16> M e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 100 0: No error 1: C410 (Once) 2: C410 (consecutively occurred) 3: 4: C430 5: C440 6: C450 7: C440 8: C450 9: C440 10: C470 11: C470 12: C480 13: C490 14: C470 15: C480 16: C490 17: C470 18: C480 19: C490 0: OFF 1: 40°C 2: 45°C 3: 50°C 4: 55°C 5: 60°C 6: 65°C 7: 70°C 8: 75°C 9: 80°C 10: 85°C 11: 90°C 12: 95°C 13: 100°C 14: 105°C 15: 110°C 16:115°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C 1 1 4 4 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 412-0 412-1 413-0 ClassifiItems cation Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Thick paper 3) Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Thick paper 1) Fuser Period of time retaining print-start temperature (Thick paper 3) 416 Fuser Temperature setting to start solving abnormality (Center/Side thermistor/ Thick paper 3) 417-0 Fuser Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 3) 422 Fuser Fuser roller temperature setting at the end of prerunning during warming-up 428-0 Fuser Period of time retaining print-start temperature (Thick paper 2) 413-1 415-0 415-1 417-1 428-1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default ProceFunc- 4 ALL 12 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 2: 130°C (black) <0-16> 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C ALL 12 M 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 4 (color) <0-16> 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C ALL 12 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 4 2: 130°C (black) <0-16> 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C ALL 13 M 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 4 (color) <0-16> 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C ALL 3 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 4 2: 2 sec (black) <0-10> 3: 3 sec 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. ALL 2 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 4 2: 2 sec. (color) <0-10> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. ALL 9 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 1 2: 130°C <0-12> 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: Invalid ALL 16 M 0: Invalid 0 sec. 4 2: 2 sec. (black) <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4:4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. ALL 0 M 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 4 (color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. ALL 9 M 0: 120°C 1: 125°C 1 2: 130°C <0-16> 3: 135°C 4: 140°C 5: 145°C 6: 150°C 7: 155°C 8: 160°C 9: 165°C 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C ALL 3 M 0: Invalid 4 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. (black) <0-10> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. ALL 2 M 0: Invalid 4 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. (color) <0-10> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 2 - 101 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Setting mode (08) Code 430 431 432 436 437-0 ClassifiItems cation Fuser Transport motor speed deceleration (OHP film) Fuser Transport motor speed deceleration (Thick paper 2) Fuser Transport motor speed deceleration (Thick paper 3) Fuser Temperature setting to start solving abnormality(Center/ Side thermistor/Thick paper 2) Fuser 437-1 438-0 Fuser 438-1 439-0 Fuser ALL (color) 2 <0-3> M ALL 9 <0-12> M ALL (black) 12 <0-16> M ALL (color) 12 <0-16> M Fuser roller temperature ALL during printing (black) (Center thermistor/OHP film) ALL (color) 12 <0-16> M 10 <0-16> M Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 2) ALL (black) 14 <0-16> M ALL (color) 0 <0-16> M Pre-running time for first printing (Plain paper/Low temperature environment) ALL (black) 12 <0-16> M ALL (color) 0 <0-16> M Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 1) ALL (black) 9 <0-16> M ALL (color) 5 <0-16> M Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor /Thick paper 2) 439-1 440-0 Fuser 440-1 441-0 441-1 Fuser Default Func- ALL 1 M Sets deceleration ratio of paper (color) <0-3> transport speed. 0: 1/1 1: 1/2 2: 1/3 3: 1/4 ALL 1 M (color) <0-3> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 102 04/05 Procedure 1 1 1 0: 120°C 3: 135°C 6: 150°C 9: 165°C 12: Invalid 0: 120°C 3: 135°C 6: 150°C 9: 165°C 12: 180°C 15: 195°C 0: 120°C 3: 135°C 6: 150°C 9: 165°C 12: 180°C 15: 195°C 0: Invalid 3: 3 sec. 6: 6 sec. 9: 10 sec. 12: 16 sec. 15: 25 sec. 0: Invalid 3: 3 sec. 6: 6 sec. 9: 10 sec. 12: 16 sec. 15: 25 sec. 0: Invalid 3: 3 sec. 6: 6 sec. 9: 10 sec. 12: 16 sec. 15: 25 sec. 1: 125°C 4: 140°C 7: 155°C 10: 170°C 2: 130°C 5: 145°C 8: 160°C 11: 175°C 1 1: 125°C 4: 140°C 7: 155°C 10: 170°C 13: 185°C 16: 200°C 1: 125°C 4: 140°C 7: 155°C 10: 170°C 13: 185°C 16: 200°C 1: 0 sec. 4: 4 sec. 7: 7 sec. 10: 12 sec. 13: 18 sec. 16: 30 sec. 1: 0 sec. 4: 4 sec. 7: 7 sec. 10: 12 sec. 13: 18 sec. 16: 30 sec. 1: 0 sec. 4: 4 sec. 7: 7 sec. 10: 12 sec. 13: 18 sec. 16: 30 sec. 2: 130°C 5: 145°C 8: 160°C 11: 175°C 14: 190°C 4 2: 130°C 5: 145°C 8: 160°C 11: 175°C 14: 190°C 4 2: 2 sec. 5: 5 sec. 8: 8 sec. 11: 14 sec. 14: 20 sec. 4 2: 2 sec. 5: 5 sec. 8: 8 sec. 11: 14 sec. 14: 20 sec. 4 2: 2 sec. 5: 5 sec. 8: 8 sec. 11: 14 sec. 14: 20 sec. 4 4 4 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 458 459 ClassifiItems cation Fuser Threshold for warming-up temperature(Low-temperature environment) Fuser Warming-up time(Lowtemperature environment) 460 Fuser 461 Fuser 462 RADF 463-0 463-1 464-0 464-1 465-0 465-1 466-0 466-1 467-0 467-1 Threshold of temperature for pre-running time for first printing(Low-temperature environment) Pre-running time for first printing(Plain paper/Lowtemperature environment) Setting for switchback operation to copy mixedsized original on RADF Default ProceFunc- ALL 6 1 M 0: 0°C 1: 5°C 2: 9°C 3: 10°C <0-11> 4: 12°C 5: 14°C 6: 15°C 7: 16°C 8: 17°C 9: 18°C 10: 19°C 11: 20°C ALL 7 M 0: No warming-up 1: 30 sec. 1 <0-11> 2: 40 sec. 3: 50 sec. 4: 60 sec. 5: 70 sec. 6: 80 sec. 7: 90 sec. 8: 100 sec. 9: 120 sec. 10: 180 sec. 11: 300 sec. ALL 9 M 0: 0°C 1: 5°C 2: 9°C 3: 10°C 1 <0-11> 4: 12°C 5: 14°C 6: 15°C 7: 16°C 8: 17°C 9: 18°C 10: 19°C 11: 20°C ALL 8 <0-11> ALL 0 <0-1> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (upper drawer) Plain paper Others ALL Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (lower drawer) Plain paper Others ALL Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (PFP upper drawer) Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (PFP lower drawer) Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (bypass feed) Plain paper Others ALL Plain paper Others ALL Plain paper Others ALL November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL M 0: Invalid (always) 1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min. 3: 1 min. 4: 2 min. 5: 3 min. 6: 5 min. 7: 7 min. 8: 10 min. 9: 15 min. 10: 30 min. 11: 60 min. SYS Sets whether or not detecting the original length by transporting without scanning in reverse when finding A4R/FOLIO paper. 0: Invalid- Judges as A4-R without transporting in reverse with no scanning. 1: Valid- Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO size by transporting in reverse with no scanning. * The original is transported in reverse with no scanning when detecting LT-LG size-paper in LT, regardless of this setting. M Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. M M Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer. M M M M M M M 1 1 4 4 4 4 Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. 4 Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. 4 Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. 4 4 4 4 2 - 103 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Setting mode (08) Code 468-0 468-1 ClassifiItems cation Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (LCF) Plain paper Others 470 Paper Paper size (305x457 mm) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 471 Paper Paper size (Post card) feeding feeding/widthwise direction 478 Laser Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error (Normal rotation) 479 Laser Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error (At acceleration/deceleration) 480 Paper Default setting of paper feeding source 481 Paper Automatic change of paper feeding source 482 Paper Feeding retry setting feeding Laser Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor 483 Default ProceFunc- ALL 5 M Sets the number of times of the 4 <0-5> feeding retry from the LCF. ALL M 4 5 <0-5> ALL M 10 457/305 <148-457/ 105-305> ALL M * Post card is supported only for JPN 10 148/100 model. <148-432/ 100-297> ALL M Displays the error [CA10] when the 1 0 set number of rotation error has been <0-1> detected. 0: 2 times 1: 12 times ALL 0 M 0: Waiting time for polygonal motor 1 <0-1> rotation overshooting 0.6 sec. 1: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 2.2 sec. PPC 0 SYS 0: A4/LT 1: LCF 1 <0-5> 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer PPC 1 SYS Sets whether or not changing the 1 <0-2> drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out. 0: OFF 1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper direction and size: ex. A4 to A4) 2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper size. Paper with the different direction is acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4 to A4-R, LT-R to LT. “1” is applied when the staple/holepunch is specified.) ALL 0 M 0: ON 1: OFF 1 <0-1> ALL SYS Sets whether or not switching the 1 0 polygonal motor from the standby <0-2> rotation to the normal rotation when the original is set on the RADF or the platen cover is opened. 0: Valid (when using RADF and the original is set manually) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (when using RADF only) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 104 05/05 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 484 ClassifiItems cation Laser Polygonal motor rotational status switching at the Auto Clear Mode 485 Laser Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby 486 Laser Timing of auto-clearing of polygonal motor pre-running rotation 487 Transfer Selection of performing the 2nd transfer roller cleaning (Bypass feed) 488 Laser 489 Laser 490 Laser 497 502 503 Setting of polygonal motor type Polygonal motor rotation number on standby Polygonal motor rotation in the energy saving mode General Speed switching for color printing Image User interface 511 Main charger 526-0 Fuser Error diffusion and dither setting at photo mode Default setting of density adjustment Main charger wire autocleaning setting Pre-running time for first printing (OHP film) 526-1 541 Image Environment correction control control of 1st transfer roller bias November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default ProceFunc- 1 ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not switching the <0-1> polygonal motor from the normal rotation to the standby rotation at the Auto Clear Mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid ALL 0 SYS Sets the rotational status of 1 <0-1> polygonal motor on standby. 0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at 08-490.) 1: Stopped ALL 0 SYS Switches the polygonal motor to the 1 <0-2> standby rotation when a certain period of time has passed from the pre-running. At this code, the period to switch the status to the standby rotation is set. 0: 15 sec. 1: 30 sec. 2: 45 sec. * This setting is effective when “0” or “2” is set at 08-483. ALL 0 M 0: Performs only at no paper size is 1 <0-1> designated 1: Performs regardless of designation of paper size ALL 3 M Set the type of polygonal motor. 1 <2-3> 2: 2 clock type 3: 3 clock type ALL M 0: 38090.55rpm 1: 35000rpm 1 5 <0-5> 2: 30000rpm 3: 25000rpm 4: 20000rpm 5: 10000rpm ALL 0 M 0: Stopped 1 1: 10000rpm <0-1> ALL M Sets the speed for color printing. 1 0 (color) 0: 11 pages/minute <0-1> 1: 6 pages/minute PPC 0 SYS Sets the image reproduction method 1 (black) <0-1> at photo mode. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither PPC 0 SYS 0: Automatic 1 (black) <0-1> 1: Manual (Center) M 0: Invalid 1 ALL 1 <0-1> 1: Valid ALL M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 4 16 2: 2 sec. (black) <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. ALL 0 M 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 4 (color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1st 1 <0-1> transfer roller bias depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 2 - 105 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/10 Setting mode (08) Code 542 ClassifiItems cation Image Transfer belt life correction control of 1st transfer roller bias 543 Image 1st transfer roller life control correction of 1st transfer roller bias 544 Image Environment correction control control of 2nd transfer roller bias 545 Image Transfer belt life correction control of 2nd transfer roller bias 546 Image 2nd transfer roller life control correction of 2nd transfer roller bias 548 Transfer Setting of 2nd transfer roller bias table (for each destination/paper thickness) 549 Image Image quality control/opencontrol loop control 1 550 Default setting of Original mode Image Image quality control/opencontrol loop control 2 551 Image 552 Image Drum life correction control control 553 Image Drum temperature correccontrol tion control 554 Image Image quality open-loop control control/Contrast voltage initial value Default ProceFunc- 1 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1st <0-1> transfer roller bias depending on the transfer belt life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1st 1 <0-1> transfer roller bias depending on the 1st transfer roller life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the transfer belt life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the 2nd transfer roller life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid EUR: 0 ALL M 0:80 g/m2 (21.3 lb.)/EUR 1 UC: 1 1:75 g/m2 (20 lb.)/UC 2:64 g/m2 (17.1 lb.)/JPN JPN: 2 <0-2> 1 ALL M Sets whether or not performing the 1 open-loop control 1.The open-loop <0-1> control 1 is performed in advance of the closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid PPC 0 SYS 0: Text/Photo 1: Photo 2: Text 1 (black) <0-3> 3: Gray Scale M Sets whether or not performing the 1 ALL 1 <0-1> open-loop control 2.The open-loop control 2 is performed before or during printing. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 ALL <0-1> drum voltage depending on the drum life in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 ALL <0-1> drum voltage depending on the drum surface temperature in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 M Sets whether or not deciding the 1 ALL <0-1> initial value of contrast voltage in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 106 05/05 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 555 Default ProceFunc- 1 1 M Sets whether or not correcting the ALL <0-1> laser power depending on the drum life when the laser power initial value is set in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Image quality closed-loop 1 M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 ALL control/Contrast voltage <0-1> contrast voltage in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Image quality closed-loop ALL 1 M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 control/Laser power <0-1> laser power in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Contrast voltage/Correction 1 M Sets whether or not switching the 1 ALL gain environment setting <0-1> correction amount once at contrast voltage correction depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Image quality closed-loop ALL 1 M Sets whether performing closed-loop 1 control automatic start-up/At (color) <0-2> control automatically at power-ON power-ON when the fuser roller temperature becomes below the specified level. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Process switching for image PPC 1 M Sets whether or not performing a 1 smoothing (Text/Photo) (black) <0-1> smoothing process (primary scanning direction, 2,400 dpi or equivalent). 0: Invalid 1: Valid Process switching for image PPC 0 M Sets whether or not performing a 1 smoothing (Photo) (black) <0-1> smoothing process (primary scanning direction, 2,400 dpi or equivalent). Process switching for image PPC 1 M 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 smoothing (Text) (black) <0-1> ClassifiItems cation Image Drum life correction of laser control power initial value 556 Image control 557 Image control 558 Image control 559 Image control 560 Image 561 Image 562 Image 565 Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Relative humidity variation ALL (color) 1 <0-2> M 566 Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Period of time unattended ALL (color) 1 <0-2> M 567 Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Accumulated print volume ALL (color) 2 <0-2> M November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the relative humidity becomes below the specified level from the previous control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the equipment has not been used for a specified period of time. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the specified number of sheets has been printed out from the previous control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) 1 1 1 2 - 107 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Code 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 583-0 583-1 583-2 Default ProceClassifiFunc- Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 2 M Sets whether or not performing 1 control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-2> closed-loop control automatically When recovered from “Toner when recovered from “Toner empty”. empty” 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 8 M Sets the fuser roller temperature to 1 control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-20> perform closed-loop control when “1” Temperature setting of fuser or “2” (valid) is set in 08-559. roller at power-ON 0: 20°C 1: 25°C 2: 30°C 3: 35°C 4: 40°C 5: 45°C 6: 50°C 7: 55°C 8: 60°C 9: 65°C 10: 70°C 11: 75°C 12: 80°C 13: 85°C 14: 90°C 15: 95°C 16: 100°C 17: 105°C 18: 110°C 19: 115°C 20: 120°C Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 4 M Sets the relative humidity difference 1 control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-6> to perform the closed-loop control Relative humidity difference when “1” or “2” (valid) is set in 08setting 565. 0: 0% 1: 5% 2: 10% 3: 15% 4: 20% 5: 25% 6: 30% Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 4 M Sets the period of time unattended to 1 control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-24> perform closed-loop control when “1” Setting of period of time or “2” (valid) is set in 08-566. unattended Setting value x 1 (hour) Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 10 M Sets the number of accumulated print 1 control control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-30> volume to perform closed-loop Setting of accumulated print control when “1” or “2” (valid) is set in volume 08-567. Setting value x 100 (pages) Image Abnormality detection count ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 control (Y) <0-16> image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] Image Abnormality detection count ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 control (M) <0-16> image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] Image Abnormality detection count ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 control (C) <0-16> image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] Image Abnormality detection count ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 control (K) <0-16> image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] Fuser Pre-running time Transport ALL 1 M 0: 3 sec. 1: 6 sec. 4 2: 9 sec. <0-10> at power-ON and motor 3: 12 sec. 4: 15 sec. 5: 18 sec. speed 1/1 ready status 6: 21 sec. 7: 24 sec. 8: 27 sec. 4 M 9: 30 sec. 10: 33 sec. 4 Transport ALL <0-10> motor speed 1/2 7 M 4 Transport ALL <0-10> motor speed 1/3 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 108 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 584 585 586 587 588 589 595 597 602 603 604 605 607 Default ProceFunc- 1 ALL 0 M 0: Decelerating to 1/1 <0-2> 1: Decelerating to 1/2 2: Decelerating to 1/3 User Default setting of Original PPC 0 SYS 0: Text/Photo 1 1: Text interface mode (color) <0-4> 2: Printed image 3: Photo 4: Map Image Image quality switching PPC 0 SYS Selects the method of image 1 when selecting the Image (black) <0-1> processing when the Image SmoothSmoothing Mode ing is selected in the original modes. 0: Processing for Image Smoothing 1: Processing when judging as black in the ACS Mode User Default setting of Density PPC 1 SYS 0: Automatic 1 interface mode (color) <0-1> 1: Manual (Center) SYS 0: Auto color 1: Black 1 User Default setting of Color PPC 1 interface mode <0-2> 2: Full color PPC SYS Selects the method of image 1 Image Image quality switching 1 when judging as black in the (black) <0-1> processing when the original is ACS Mode judged as black in the ACS Mode. 0: Processing for Image Smoothing 1: Processing when judging as black in the ACS Mode Image Scanning operation PPC 0 SYS 0: Scanning color/black integrated 1 switching at automatic (Color) <0-1> pattern calibration 1: Scanning color pattern only Image Gamma correction table all PRT SYS Initializes the status of automatic 3 clearing (color) gamma adjustment in color printing. User Screen setting for automatic EUR:0 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 ALL interface energy saver/automatic UC:1 JPN:1 power OFF <0-1> User Setting for automatic ALL SYS 0: Invalid 1 0 interface duplexing mode 1: Single-sided to duplex copying <0-3> 2: Two-sided to duplex copying 3: User selection User Default setting for APS/AMS ALL 0 SYS 0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 1 interface <0-2> 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected User Centering printing of primary/ PPC 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1 1: Valid interface secondary direction at AMS <0-1> PPC SYS 0: Continuous feeding 1 User Default setting of RADF 0 (by pressing the [START] button) interface mode <0-1> 1: Single feeding (by setting original on the tray) ClassifiItems cation Fuser Transport motor speed of pre-running at ready status November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 109 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Setting mode (08) Code 609-0 609-1 609-2 609-3 609-4 610 611 612 Default Func- SYS Step ALL 88 -2 <0-255> ALL SYS Step 108 -1 <0-255> ALL SYS Step 148 0 (center) <0-255> ALL SYS Step 178 +1 <0-255> ALL SYS Step 208 +2 <0-255> Key touch sound of control ALL SYS 1 panel <0-1> PPC SYS Book type original priority 0 <0-1> Summer time mode ALL SYS 0 <0-1> Paper size selection for PPC SYS EUR: [OTHER] button FOLIO UC:COMP JPN:A5-R Local I/F time-out period ALL SYS 6 <1-50> ClassifiItems cation Image Binarizing level setting (When judging as black in the ACS Mode) User interface User interface General 613 User interface 614 Network 615 General Size information of main memory and page memory ALL - SYS 616 Counter Counting method in Twin Color Mode (Limitation Function) ALL JPN: 1 UC: 0 EUR: 0 <0-1> SYS 617 User interface User interface Paper feeding Print setting without department code Default setting of RADF original size Time lag before auto-start of bypass feeding ALL 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 4 <0-10> SYS User interface User interface User interface User interface Department management setting (Copier) Department management setting (FAX) Department management setting (Printer) Department management setting (Scanner) 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> SYS 618 619 620 621 622 623 PPC ALL PPC FAX PRT SCN e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 110 SYS SYS Contents Procedure Sets the binarizing level of each step. When the value increases, the image becomes darker. When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. *Refer to 08-268. 4 4 4 4 4 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Not summer time 1: Summer time Press the icon on the LCD to select the size. 1 Sets the period of time when the job is judged as completed in local I/F printing (USB or parallel). 1: 1.0 sec. 2: 1.5 sec. - 50: 25.5 sec. (in increments of 0.5 sec.) Displays the sizes of the main memory and page memory. Enables to check if each memory is properly recognized. Sets the counting method in Twin Color Mode with the Limitation Function. 0: Count as color 1: Count as black 0: Printed 1: Not printed 0: Same size originals 1: Mixed size originals Sets the time taken to add paper feeding when paper in the bypass tray has run out during the bypass feed copying. 0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button is pressed. 1-10: Setting value x 0.5sec. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 1 1 9 2 1 1 1 1 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 624 625 627 628 629 632 634 636 638 Classification User interface User interface Department management setting (List print) Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jamming User interface User interface User interface User interface Rotation printing at the nonsorting Direction priority of original image Department management setting Automatic calibration disclosure level Items User interface User interface Inner receiving tray priority at Non-sort Mode Width setting for image shift copying (linkage of front side and back side) General Time differences Default ProceFunc- PRT 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 <0-1> PPC SYS 0: OFF 1 0 1: ON (Start printing when the <0-1> scanning of each page is finished) ALL 0 SYS 0: Not rotating 1 1: Rotating <0-1> PPC SYS 0: Automatic 1: Portrait 1 0 <0-1> ALL SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 0 <0-1> PPC SYS Sets the disclosing level of automatic 1 1 calibration. <0-2> 0: Service technician 1: Administrator 2: User ALL 0 SYS 0: Normal 1 <0-1> 1: Inner receiving tray PPC SYS 0: ON 1: OFF 1 0 <0-1> ALL 640 User Date display format interface ALL 641 User Automatic Sorting Mode interface setting (RADF) PPC 642 User Default setting of Sorter interface Mode PPC 643 User Color 1 at twin color PPC interface selection (Select what color (color) black in original is copied) User Color 2 at twin color PPC interface selection (Select what color (color) other than black in original is copied) 644 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h 2: +11.0h UC: 40 3: +10.5h 4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h JPN: 6 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h 8: +8.0h <0-47> 9: +7.5h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h 20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h 22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h 24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h 26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h 28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h 30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h 34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h 36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h 38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h 40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h 42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h 44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h 46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h EUR:1 SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD. 1: DD.MM.YYYY UC:2 2: MM.DD.YYYY JPN:0 <0-2> SYS 0: Invalid 1: STAPLE 2 2:SORT 3: GROUP <0-4> 4: ROTATE SORT 0 SYS 0: NON-SORT 1: STAPLE <0-4> 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ROTATE SORT 0 SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M 3: C <0-6> 4: R 5: G 6: B 4 <0-6> SYS 0: K 4: R 1: Y 5: G 2: M 6: B 3: C 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 111 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/09 Setting mode (08) Code 645 ClassifiItems cation User Correction of reproduction interface ratio in editing copy 646 User Image position in editing interface 647 User interface User interface Rotation of paper direction for BOX printing Returning finisher tray when printing is finished User interface User interface User interface Magazine sort setting User interface User interface User interface Cascade operation setting 648 649 650 651 652 653 657 658 2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating order setting Printing format setting for Time Stamp and Page Number Cascade operation setting Default setting of printing direction for Time Stamp and Page Number User Auto-start setting for bypass interface feed printing Default ProceFunc- PPC 10 SYS Sets the reproduction ratio for the “X 1 <0-10> in 1” printing (including magazine sort) to the “Reproduction ratio x Correction ratio”. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% PPC 0 SYS Sets the page pasted position for “X 1 <0-1> in 1” to the upper left corner/center. 0: Cornering 1: Centering ALL 1 SYS 0: Rotation OFF 1 <0-1> 1: Rotation ON ALL SYS Sets whether or not returning the 1 0 <0-1> finisher tray to the bin 1 when printing is finished. 0: Not returned 1: Returned PPC 0 SYS 0: Left page to right page 1 <0-1> 1: Right page to left page PPC SYS 0: Horizontal 1 0 <0-1> 1: Vertical PPC SYS 1 2 Hyphen Dropout (with page number)(with date, time and page number) <0-3> 0: OFF OFF 1: ON OFF 2: OFF ON 3: ON ON Note: Hyphen printing format ON: -1- OFF: 1 PPC 0 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 <0-1> PRT SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 0 <0-1> PPC SYS 0: Short edge 1 0 1: Long edge <0-1> PRT 0 <0-1> 659 User Auto-start setting for bypass interface feed printing PPC 1 <0-1> 660 Network Auto-forwarding setting of received FAX Network Auto-forwarding setting of received E-mail ALL 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 661 ALL e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 112 SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatical feeding) SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatical feeding) SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 662 ClassifiItems cation General Clearing of SMS partition Default ProceFunc- SYS Clears SMS partition. (Performs 3 ALL when the service call [F106] has occurred.) PPC 0 SYS Sets the counting method of fee 1 <0-2> charging or department count in Twin Color Mode. 0: Count as Twin Color Mode 1: Count as Black Mode 2: Count as Full Color Mode ALL M/ Initializes all the adjustment modes 3 SYS and the setting modes. ALL SYS Initializes the Electronic Filing. 3 ALL SYS Initializes the shared folder. 3 ALL SYS Initializes system NVRAM area. 3 663 Counter Counting method in Twin Color Mode 665 General M/SYS all clearing 666 667 669 General /SHR partition clearing General /SHA partition clearing General System all clearing 670 General HDD diagnostic menu display User Size indicator interface General Initialization of department management information ALL - ALL 0 <0-1> - Paper Coated Paper feeding Mode setting for paper source Upper drawer ALL 0 <0-1> 675-1 Lower drawer ALL 0 <0-1> 675-2 PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF ALL 0 <0-1> ALL 0 <0-1> ALL 0 <0-1> 671 672 675-0 675-3 675-4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC - SYS Display the HDD information 2 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 SYS Initializing of the department management information * Enter the code with the digital keys and press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization. If the area storing the department management information is destroyed for some reason, “Enter Department Code” is displayed on the control panel even if the department management function is not set on. In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. SYS Sets whether or not applying the Coated Paper Mode to each paper source. SYS 0: Normal mode 1: Coated Paper Mode * Coated Paper Mode - This mode is SYS selected when the paper which often causes the misfeeding (ex. coated paper) is used. The occurrence of SYS misfeeding is reduced by lengthening the jam detection time. However, the printing speed is lowered since the SYS printing cycle is also lengthened with the lengthened jam detection time. 3 4 4 4 4 4 2 - 113 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/10 Setting mode (08) Code 676 677-0 ClassifiItems cation Paper Bypass copy printing feeding [COATED] button display Paper Coated Paper feeding Mode setting at bypass feeding Plain paper 677-1 Thick paper 1 677-2 Thick paper 2 677-3 Thick paper 3 677-4 OHP film 677-5 Envelope 678 General Setting of banner advertising display 679 General Banner advertising display 1 680 General Banner advertising display 2 681 General Display of [BANNER MESSAGE] button Default ProceFunc- 1 PPC SYS Sets whether or not displaying the 0 [COATED] button on the LCD screen <0-1> at bypass feeding. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed (The Coated Paper Mode is applied by pressing the [COATED] button at bypass feeding.) * Coated Paper Mode - This mode is selected when the paper which often causes the misfeeding (ex. coated paper) is used. The occurrence of misfeeding is reduced by lengthening the jam detection time. However, the printing speed is lowered since the printing cycle is also lengthened with the lengthened jam detection time. PRT 0 SYS Sets whether or not applying the 4 <0-1> Coated Paper Mode on each paper type at bypass printing. PRT 0 SYS 0: Normal mode 4 <0-1> 1: Coated Paper Mode * Coated Paper Mode - This mode is PRT 0 SYS selected when the paper which 4 <0-1> often causes the misfeeding (ex. coated paper) is used. The occurPRT 0 SYS rence of misfeeding is reduced by 4 <0-1> lengthening the jam detection time. However, the printing speed is PRT 0 SYS lowered since the printing cycle is 4 <0-1> also lengthened with the lengthened jam detection time. PRT 0 SYS 4 <0-1> ALL SYS Sets whether or not displaying the 1 0 banner advertising. The setting <0-1> contents of 08-679 and 08-680 are displayed at the time display section on the right top of the screen. When both are set, each content is displayed alternately. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed ALL SYS Maximum 27 letters 11 (one-byte character) ALL SYS Maximum 27 letters 11 (one-byte character) ALL 0 SYS 0: Not displayed 1 1: Displayed <0-1> * This button enables the entry of “Banner advertising display 1(08679)” and “Banner advertising display 2 (08-680)” on the control panel. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 114 04/09 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 682 683 684 685 ClassifiItems cation User Offsetting between jobs interface General Duplex printing setting when coin controller is used 690 General Rebuilding all databases General Rebuilding all databases related to Address Book General Rebuilding all databases related to log FAX Adaptation of paper source priority selection General HDD formatting 691 General HDD type display 692 Mainte- Performing panel calibration nance 693 General Initialization of NIC information General Performing HDD testing Scrambler Installation of scrambler board board (Option) Paper Paper type priority feeding 686 689 694 696 697 698 Scrambler Entering the key code for board scrambler board 699 Scrambler Erasing all data in HDD board FAX Destination setting for FAX 701 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default ProceFunc- ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 <0-1> ALL SYS When the duplex printing is short 1 1 paid with a coin controller, reverse <0-1> side of the original is not printed and is considered as a defect (printing job may be cleared). To solve this problem, the selection of printing method is enabled with this setting. 0: Invalid (Both sides printed) 1: Valid (Only one side printed) ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases. 3 ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases related to the 3 Address Book. ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases related to the 3 logs. FAX 0 SYS 0: Not subjected for APS judgment 1 <0-1> 1: Subjected for APS judgment ALL SYS 2: Normal formatting 7 <2> ALL SYS 0: Not formatted 1: Not used 7 <0-2> 2: Normal format ALL SYS Performs the calibration of the pressing 1 position on the touch panel (LCD screen). The calibration is performed by pressing 2 reference positions after this code is started up. ALL SYS Returns the value to the factory 3 shipping default value. ALL SYS Checks the bad sector. 3 ALL 0 - 0: Not installed 2 <0-1> 1: Installed PPC SYS Sets the paper type priority during 1 1 <1-2> copying. 1: Normal paper 2: Thick paper 1 ALL - Start up this code and have the user 5 enter the key code. Once the key code has been set, this code cannot be set again on security grounds. ALL - This setting is effective only when the 3 scrambler board is installed. FAX EUR: 5 SYS 0: Japan 1 1: Asia UC: 4 2: Australia 3: Hong Kong JPN: 0 4: U.S.A./Canada 5: Germany Other: 1 6: U.K. 7: Italy <0-25> 8: Belgium 9: Netherlands 10: Finland 11: Spain 12: Austria 13: Switzerland 14: Sweden 15: Denmark 16: Norway 17: Portugal 18: France 19: Greece 20: Poland 21: Hungary 22: Czech 23: Turkey 24: South Africa 25: Taiwan 2 - 115 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Setting mode (08) Code 702 703 707 Classification Maintenance Maintenance Items Remote-controlled service function Remote-controlled service HTTP server URL setting Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance HTTP initially-registered server URL setting Default Func- ALL 2 SYS 0: Valid (Remote-controlled server) <0-2> 1: Valid (L2) 2: Invalid ALL SYS Maximum 256 Bytes - ALL 710 Mainte- Short time interval setting of nance recovery from Emergency Mode ALL 711 Maintenance Maintenance Short time interval setting of Emergency Mode Remote-controlled service periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Remote-controlled service Writing data of selfdiagnostic code Remote-controlled service response waiting time (Timeout) Remote-controlled service initial registration Remote-controlled service tentative password Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only) Service center call function ALL 715 716 Maintenance 717 Maintenance 718 Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance 719 720 721 Maintenance 723 Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance (Remote) 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 ALL https:// SYS Maximum 256 Bytes device.mfpsupport.com: 443/device/ firstregist.ashx 24 SYS Sets the time interval to recover from <1-48> the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode. (Unit: Hour) 60 SYS Unit: Minute <30-360> SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59) 1230 1 11 11 1 1 1 ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Prohibited ALL 3 <1-30> SYS Unit: Minute 1 ALL 0 <0-1> - SYS 0: OFF 1: Start 2: Only certification is scanned SYS Maximum 10 letters 1 ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Not registered 1: Registered 2 ALL 2 <0-2> 1 Service center call HTTP server URL setting HTTP proxy setting ALL - SYS 0: OFF 1: Notifies all service calls 2: Notifies all but paper jams SYS Maximum 256 letters 11 ALL SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid 1 HTTP proxy IP address setting HTTP proxy port number setting HTTP proxy ID setting ALL 1 <0-1> - SYS 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) SYS 11 HTTP proxy password setting HTTP proxy panel display ALL - ALL Automatic ordering function of supplies ALL 1 <0-1> 3 <0-3> ALL ALL ALL 1: Accepted Procedure 0 <0-65535> SYS Maximum 30 letters - e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 116 05/05 1 11 1 11 SYS Maximum 30 letters 11 SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid 1 SYS 0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 733 734 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) 745 Maintenance (Remote) 746 Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) 747 748 749 750 751 752 Items Automatic ordering function of supplies FAX number Automatic ordering function of supplies E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's name Automatic ordering function of supplies User's telephone number Automatic ordering function of supplies User's E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's address Automatic ordering function of supplies Service number Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's name Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's telephone number Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies Supplier's name Automatic ordering function of supplies Supplier's address Automatic ordering function of supplies Notes Information about supplies Part number of toner cartridge C Information about supplies Order quantity of toner cartridge C Information about supplies Condition number of toner cartridge C Information about supplies Part number of toner cartridge M November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default Func- ALL SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/ Pause] button ALL SYS Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits Procedure 11 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 50 letters 11 ALL - 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/ Pause] button SYS Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits ALL - SYS Maximum 100 letters 11 ALL 0 SYS Maximum 5 digits <5 digits> 11 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 50 letters 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/ Pause] button 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 50 letters 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 100 letters 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 128 letters 11 ALL - SYS Maximum 20 digits 11 ALL 1 <1-99> SYS 1 ALL 1 <1-99> SYS 1 ALL - SYS Maximum 20 digits 11 2 - 117 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/09 Setting mode (08) Code 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 767 768 769 770 Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Items Information about supplies Order quantity of toner cartridge M Information about supplies Condition number of toner cartridge M Information about supplies Part number of toner cartridge Y Information about supplies Order quantity of toner cartridge Y Information about supplies Condition number of toner cartridge Y Information about supplies Part number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies Order quantity of toner cartridge K Information about supplies Condition number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies Part number of toner bag Default Func- ALL 1 SYS <1-99> ALL 1 <1-99> ALL - ALL Contents Procedure 1 SYS 1 SYS Maximum 20 digits 11 1 <1-99> SYS 1 ALL 1 <1-99> SYS 1 ALL - SYS Maximum 20 digits 11 ALL 1 <1-99> SYS 1 ALL 1 <1-99> SYS 1 ALL - SYS Maximum 20 digits 11 Information about supplies Order quantity of toner bag ALL 1 <1-99> SYS 1 Information about supplies Condition number of toner bag Automatic ordering supplies Result table printout ALL 1 <1-99> SYS 1 ALL 1 <0-2> SYS 0: OFF 1: Always 2: ON Error 1 Automatic ordering supplies Display ALL 2 <0-2> 1 Service Notification setting ALL 0 <0-2> Destination E-mail address 1 ALL - SYS 0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) 1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP) 2: Invalid SYS Enables to set up to 3 E-mail addresses to be sent. (08-768, 777, 778) 0: Invalid 1: Valid (E-mail) 2: Valid (FAX) SYS Maximum 192 letters 11 Total counter information transmission setting ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1 Total counter transmission date setting ALL 1 <1-31> SYS 1 to 31 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 118 05/05 1: Valid 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance 781 Maintenance 782 Maintenance 783 Maintenance 784 Maintenance 785 Maintenance 786 Maintenance 787 Maintenance Items PM counter notification setting Default Func- ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid <0-1> Contents 1: Valid Procedure 1 Dealer's name ALL - Login name ALL - Display setting of [Service Notification] button ALL 0 <0-1> Sending error contents of equipment ALL 0 <0-1> Setting total counter transmission interval (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Destination E-mail address 2 ALL - SYS 1 ALL - SYS Maximum 192 letters 11 Destination E-mail address 3 ALL - SYS Maximum 192 letters 11 Notification format selection ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Text 1: Text + XML data 1 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-1 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-2 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-3 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-4 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Sunday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Monday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Tuesday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Wednesday ALL 0 <0-31> SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 1 ALL 0 <0-31> SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 1 ALL 0 <0-31> SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 1 ALL 0 <0-31> SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 1 ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC SYS Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial registration SYS Maximum 20 letters Needed at initial registration SYS 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 11 SYS 0: Invalid 1 1: Valid 11 1 2 - 119 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Setting mode (08) ClassifiItems cation 788 Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Thursday 789 Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Friday 790 Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Saturday 791 Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner cartridge C 792 Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner cartridge M 793 Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner cartridge Y 794 Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner cartridge K 795 Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner bag 796 Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance lengthened interval polling (End of month) 797 Mainte- Firmware download nance 810 Image Transfer bias correction control table setting 819-0 Develop- Color auto-toner Y ment sensor output 819-1 setting for initial M developer 819-2 material C Code 820-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor output 820-1 display for developer material 820-2 821 Y M C Develop- ON/OFF of the mode for ment developer material stabilization 822-0 Develop- Number of times ment the mode for 822-1 developer material stabilization is 822-2 performed Y M C Default Func- SYS 0: Invalid ALL 0 <0-1> Contents Procedure 1: Valid 1 ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) 0 SYS 0: Accepted 1: Prohibited <0-1> M 1 : TYPE1 2 : TYPE2 3 : TYPE3 2 <1-3> M Sets the target output value of color 256 <0-1023> auto-toner sensor to the sleeve in the M auto-toner control. (This is set when 256 <0-1023> performing the automatic adjustment M of auto-toner sensor.) 256 <0-1023> M Displays the output value of the color <0-1023> auto-toner sensor to the sleeve in M color printing. <0-1023> M <0-1023> M Sets whether or not performing an 0 aging to stabilize the status of <0-1> developer material when the toner density is uneven or the toner charging amount is lowered. 0: ON 1: OFF 0 M Displays the number of times the <0-255> developer material stabilization is M performed. 0 <0-255> M 0 <0-255> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 120 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) 860-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of 860-1 OFF level voltage 861-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of standard light 861-1 amount voltage Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Lower limit Default Func- ALL 0 M Displays “1” when the abnormal output voltage is detected for the (color) <0-1> M color auto-toner sensor light amount ALL 0 (color) <0-1> correction. ([CF40] error) M 0: Normal ALL 0 (color) <0-1> 1: Abnormality detected M Displays “1” when the abnormal ALL 0 (color) <0-1> toner density detection voltage is M detected. ([CF20] error) ALL 0 (color) <0-1> 0: Normal M 1: Abnormality detected ALL 0 (color) <0-1> ALL Other than M TWD and SAD: 0 TWD and SAD: 1 <0-1> ALL 0 M Becomes “1” when detecting the (color) <0-1> toner empty. ALL 0 M 0: Normal (color) <0-1> 1: Empty detected ALL 0 M (color) <0-1> ALL 0 M Becomes “1” when the toner density (color) <0-1> decreases and it is judged forced ALL 0 M toner supply is needed. (color) <0-1> 0: Normal level ALL 0 M 1: Forced supply level (color) <0-1> ALL 20 M Sets the range for judging whether (color) <0-1023> the sensor output value when the ALL 0 M sensor light source is OFF is correct (color) <0-1023> or not. ALL 205 M Sets the range for judging whether (color) <0-255> the adjustment result of sensor light amount is correct or not. ALL 40 M (color) <0-255> 862-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of reference plate 862-1 output Upper limit ALL 820 (color) <0-1023> M Lower limit ALL 205 (color) <0-1023> M 863-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of 863-1 developer output Upper limit Lower limit ALL 450 (color) <0-1023> ALL 155 (color) <0-1023> M ClassifiItems cation 823-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/light amount correction 823-1 voltage abnormal detection 823-2 Code 824-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/toner density detection 824-1 voltage abnormal detection 824-2 849 Fuser Y M C Y M C Fusing control switching for TWD and SAD models 858-0 Develop- Toner empty ment detection 858-1 M 858-2 C 859-0 Develop- Color toner forced ment supply level display 859-1 Y M 859-2 C November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Y M Sets the range for judging whether the sensor output value for the reference plate is correct or not. Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 14 14 14 14 14 14 4 4 4 4 4 4 Sets the range for judging whether the sensor output value for the sleeve is correct or not. 4 4 2 - 121 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Setting mode (08) ClassifiItems cation 864 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ment sensor OFF output value display at power ON 865 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ment reference plate output value display at power ON Upper 866-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/abnormal limit detection potential 866-1 Lower difference setting limit of reference plate output 867 Develop- Color auto-toner control ment environment and life light amount correction setting Code 868 Develop- Color auto-toner adjustment ment finishing range setting Develop- Color auto-toner control ment environment and life light amount correction/correction finishing range setting 870 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ment setting of number of times of error detection at light amount correction 871 Develop- Color auto-toner control ment environment and life light amount correction/display of number of times of reference plate detection error 872 Develop- Color auto-toner control ment environment and life light amount correction/display of number of times of light amount control voltage adjustment error 873-0 Develop- Color auto-toner Y ment control/developer initial output 873-1 M setting 873-2 C 869 Default ProceFunc- 2 ALL M Displays the sensor output value when the sensor light source is OFF (color) <0-1023> at power ON. ALL 2 M Displays the sensor output value with (color) <0-1023> the standard light amount for the reference plate at power ON. ALL 820 M Sets the range for judging whether 4 (color) <0-1023> the difference between the sensor output when the sensor light source ALL 205 M is OFF and the sensor output for the 4 (color) <0-1023> reference plate is correct or not. ALL (color) 0 <0-1> M ALL (color) 4 <0-255> M ALL (color) 5 <0-255> M ALL (color) 3 <0-255> M ALL (color) 0 <0-255> M ALL (color) 0 <0-255> ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 122 Sets whether the sensor light amount is corrected or not depending on the environment and life. 0: Correction 1: No correction Sets the difference from the target value for judging whether the color auto-toner adjustment finishes correctly or not. Sets the difference from the target value for judging whether the light amount correction finishes correctly or not. Sets the number of times of continuous error detection before the light amount correction abnormality is displayed. Displays the number of times of the reference plate detection error for the environment and life light amount correction. 1 M Displays the number of times of the light amount control voltage adjustment error for the environment and life light amount correction. 2 M Sets the initial developer output target value. 4 1 1 1 2 M 4 M 4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 874 ClassifiItems cation Develop- Color developer life correcment tion 875-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 0) 875-1 M 875-2 C 876-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 1) 876-1 Y M 876-2 C 877-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 2) 877-1 Y M 877-2 C 878-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 3) 878-1 Y M 878-2 C 879-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 4) 879-1 Y M 879-2 C 880-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 5) 880-1 Y M 880-2 C 881-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 6) 881-1 Y M 881-2 C 900 Version System firmware ROM version November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Y Default ProceFunc- ALL 0 M Sets whether the toner density 1 (color) <0-1> detection voltage correction is performed or not depending on the developer life in the color auto-toner control. 0: Corrected 1: Not corrected ALL 0 M Sets the correction amount of the 4 (color) <-512-511> toner density detection voltage ALL 0 M depending on the developer life. In 4 (color) <-512-511> this code, the life count within 0-2000 ALL 0 M is set as the correction amount. 4 (color) <-512-511> ALL -4 M Sets the correction amount of the 4 (color) <-512-511> toner density detection voltage ALL -2 M depending on the developer life. In 4 (color) <-512-511> this code, the life count within 2001ALL -2 M 5000 is set as the correction amount. 4 (color) <-512-511> ALL -6 M Sets the correction amount of the 4 (color) <-512-511> toner density detection voltage ALL -3 M depending on the developer life. In 4 (color) <-512-511> this code, the life count within 5001ALL -3 M 10000 is set as the correction 4 (color) <-512-511> amount. ALL -8 M Sets the correction amount of the 4 (color) <-512-511> toner density detection voltage ALL -4 M depending on the developer life. In 4 (color) <-512-511> this code, the life count within 10001ALL -4 M 20000 is set as the correction 4 (color) <-512-511> amount. ALL -10 M Sets the correction amount of the 4 (color) <-512-511> toner density detection voltage ALL -5 M depending on the developer life. In 4 (color) <-512-511> this code, the life count within 20001ALL -5 M 30000 is set as the correction 4 (color) <-512-511> amount. ALL -12 M Sets the correction amount of the 4 (color) <-512-511> toner density detection voltage ALL -6 M depending on the developer life. In 4 (color) <-512-511> this code, the life count within 30001ALL -6 M 37500 is set as the correction 4 (color) <-512-511> amount. ALL -12 M Sets the correction amount of the 4 (color) <-512-511> toner density detection voltage ALL -6 M depending on the developer life. In 4 (color) <-512-511> this code, the life count 37501 or ALL -6 M more is set as the correction amount. 4 (color) <-512-511> - JPN: T350SY0JXXX 2 ALL UC: T350SY0UXXX EUR: T350SY0EXXX Others: T350SY0XXXX 2 - 123 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Default Func- - 350M-XXX ALL 903 ClassifiItems cation Version Engine ROM version 905 Version Scanner ROM version ALL - - 350S-XXX 2 907 Version RADF ROM version ALL - - DF-XXXX 2 908 Version Finisher ROM version ALL - - SDL-XX FIN-XX 2 915 Version FAX board ROM version FAX - - F562-XXX 2 916 Version NIC board ROM version ALL - - X.XXX 2 920 ALL - - VX.XX/X.XX 2 921 Version FROM basic section software version Version FROM internal program ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 922 Version UI data fixed section version ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 923 Version UI data common section version Version Version of UI data language 1 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 2 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 3 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 4 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 5 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 6 in HDD Version Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power-ON Version Version of UI data language 7 in HDD Version Web data whole version ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 ALL - - VXXX.XXX X 2 Code 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 1 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 2 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 3 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 4 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 5 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 6 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 124 04/09 Contents Procedure 2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 944 945 947 ClassifiItems cation Version HD version Network Two-way setting of RawPort 9100 General Initialization after software version upgrade 948 General Mode setting by pressing [Energy Saver] button for a while 949 General Automatic interruption page setting during black printing 950 951 953 954 969 970 973 975 976 977 Electronic filing Start-up method of Electronic Filing User Image setting for Electronic interface Filing printing (Only for color image) User Access code entry for interface Electronic Filing printing User Clearing timing for files and interface Electronic Filing Agent User interface User interface Network ALL ALL Error sound ALL Sound setting when switching to Energy Saving Mode PCL line feed code setting ALL General Job handling when printing is short paid with coin controller Electronic Filing Default ProceFunc- ALL - JPN: T350HD0JXXX 2 UC: T350HD0UXXX EUR: T350HD0EXXX Others: T350HD0XXXX ALL 1 UTY 1: Valid 12 <1-2> 2: Invalid ALL - Perform this code when the software 3 in this equipment has been upgraded. ALL 0 SYS Sets the mode to enter when the 1 <0-1> [Energy Saver] button is pressed for a while. 0: Sleep Mode 1: Auto Shut Off Mode ALL 0 SYS Sets the number of pages to interrupt 1 <0-100> the printing automatically. 0-100: 0 to 100 pages ALL 0 SYS Sets the start-up method of the 1 <0-3> Electronic Filing. 0: Standard 1: Forced start-up (Not recovered) 2: Forced start-up (Recovered) 3: Data update ALL 0 SYS 0: General 1 1: Photograph <0-3> 2: Presentation 3: Line art Equipment name setting to a folder when saving files Network Switching of extended ASCII code in catFs filesystem November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC PRT 0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-3> ALL 1 <0-1> ALL 0 <0-1> ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Renewed automatically 1: Enter every time SYS 0: Immediately after the completion of scanning 1: Cleared by Auto Clear SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 SYS Sets the PCL line feed code. 0: Automatic setting 1: CR=CR, LF=LF 2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF 3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF SYS Sets whether pause or stop the printing job when it is short paid using a coin controller. 0: Pause the job 1: Stop the job SYS Sets whether or not adding the equipment name to the folder when saving files. 0: Not add 1: Add SYS 0: ISO8859-1 1: ISO8859-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 125 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/10 Setting mode (08) Code 978 ClassifiItems cation Network Raw printing job (Paper feeding drawer) 979 Network Raw printing job (PCL symbol set) 986 General Copy function setting 988 Paper Setting of paper size feeding switching to 13" LG Default Func- PRT 0 SYS 0: AUTO 1: Upper drawer <0-5> 2: Lower drawer 3: PFP upper drawer 4: PFP lower drawer 5: LCF PRT 0 SYS 0: Roman-8 <0-39> 1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 4: PC-8, Code Page 437 5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/Norwegian 6: PC-850, Multilingual 7: PC-852, Latin2 8: PC-8 Turkish 9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 12: DeskTop 13: PS Text 14: Ventura International 15: Ventura US 16: Microsoft Publishing 17: Math-8 18: PS Math 19: Ventura Math 20: Pi Font 21: Legal 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom 23: ISO 6: ASCII 24: ISO 11 25: ISO 15: Italian 26: ISO 17 27: ISO 21: German 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 29: ISO 69: French 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1 31: MC Text 32: PC Cyrillic 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 35: PC-775 36: PC-1004 37: Symbol 38: Windows Baltic 39: Wingdings PPC 0 SYS Sets the copy function to be invalid. <0-1> 0: Valid 1: Invalid ALL 0 SYS 0: Not switched <0-2> 1: LG→13"LG 2: FOLIO→13"LG e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 126 04/10 Procedure 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification 989 Scrambler board Maintenance 995 999 Items Default Func- Scrambler board initial setting ALL Equipment number (serial number) display ALL Mainte- FSMS total counter nance Network Reset of NIC board ALL 1002 Network Selection of NIC board status information ALL 1003 Network Speed setting of Ethernet ALL 1004 Network NIC Web password ALL 1005 Network Availability of IP ALL 1006 Network Address Mode ALL 1007 1008 Network Domain name Network IP address ALL ALL 1009 Network Subnet mask ALL 1010 Network Gateway ALL 1011 Network Availability of IPX ALL 1012 Network Network frame type ALL 1013 Network Availability of NCP Burst ALL 1014 Network Availability of AppleTalk ALL 1015 Network Zone setting of AppleTalk ALL 1016 Network Availability of LDAP ALL 1017 Network Availability of DNS ALL 1018 Network IP address to DNS server (Primary) Network IP address to DNS server (Secondary) ALL 1001 1019 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC ALL ALL - - Contents Performs the initial setting of the scrambler board. 0 SYS This code can be also keyed in from <10 digits> the adjustment mode (05-976). 10 digits 0 SYS Refer to values of total counter. <8 digits> NIC 1: Cold 2: Warm 3: Not reset 3 <1-3> NIC 1: Not printed out when the copier is 1 restarted <1-2> 2: Printed out when the copier is restarted 3 NIC 1: 10 MBPS 2: 100 MBPS <1-3> 3: Automatic NIC Writing only (Current setting is not displayed.) Maximum 31 letters 1 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available <1-2> NIC 1: Fixed IP address 2 2: Dynamic IP address <1-5> 3: Dynamic IP address without AutoIP 4: Dynamic IP address without BOOTP 5: Dynamic IP address without DHCP NIC Maximum 96 letters NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available <1-2> NIC 1: Automatic 2: IEEE802.3 1 3: Ethernet II 4: IEEE802.3 SNAP <1-5> 5: IEEE802.2 1 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available <1-2> NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 1 <1-2> NIC Maximum 32 letters ∗ *: Wildcard character 1 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available <1-2> NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 1 <1-2> NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Procedure 3 11 1 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 2 - 127 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1020 Network DDNS Desired level ALL 1 <1-5> 1021 Network Availability of SLP ALL 1023 1024 1026 Network NetBios name Network Name of WINS server or IP address (Primary) Network Name of WINS server or IP address (Secondary) Network Availability of Bindery 1027 Network Availability of NDS ALL 1028 1029 1030 Network Directory service context Network Directory service tree Network Availability of HTTP server ALL ALL ALL 1031 Network Port number to NIC HTTP server Network Port number to system HTTP server Network Availability of NIC HTTP client Network TCP port number to Controller HTTP client Network IP address to HTTP server (Primary) Network Availability of SMTP client ALL Network FQDN or IP address to SMTP server Network TCP port number of SMTP client Network Availability of SMTP server ALL ALL 1043 Network TCP port number of SMTP server Network E-mail box name to SMTP server Network Availability of Offramp 1044 Network Offramp security ALL 1045 Network Printing at Offramp ALL 1046 Network Availability of POP3 clients ALL 1047 Network FQDN or IP address to POP3 server Network Types of POP3 server ALL 1025 1032 1033 1034 1035 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1048 Items Contents Procedure 12 ALL ALL 1 <1-2> - NIC 1: Invalid 2: Via DHCP 3: Insecure DDNS 4: Secure DDNS 5: Multi-secure DDNS NIC 1: Available 2: Not available UTY Maximum 15 letters UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 12 ALL - UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 ALL 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 80 <1-65535> 8080 <1-65535> 2 <1-2> 80 <1-65535> - NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 12 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 12 NIC Maximum 127 letters NIC Maximum 47 letters NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 12 12 12 NIC 12 SYS 1 ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 1 <1-2> 25 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 25 <1-65535> - NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 12 12 UTY 12 NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 12 NIC Maximum 128 Bytes 12 NIC 12 UTY 1: Available 2: Not available 12 12 UTY 12 UTY Maximum 192 letters 12 2 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> - UTY 1: Available 2: Not available 12 UTY 1: Available 2: Not available 12 UTY 1: Available 2: Not available 12 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 12 NIC Maximum 128 Bytes 12 1 <1-3> NIC 1: Automatic 3: APOP 12 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 128 05/05 2: POP3 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1049 1050 1051 Network Login name to POP3 server Network Login password to POP3 Network E-mail reception interval ALL ALL ALL 1052 Network TCP port number of POP3 client Network Availability of FTP client ALL Network FQDN or IP address to FTP server Network TCP port number of FTP client Network Data port number of FTP client Network Login name to FTP server Network Login password to FTP server Network Availability of FTP server ALL Network TCP port number of FTP server Network Login name to FTP client Network Login password to FTP client Network MIB function ALL Network Setting of read Community Network Setting of read/Write Community Network Authentication TRAP function Network ALERTS TRAP function ALL ALL 1073 Network TRAP destination IP address Network Community setting of TRAP (via IP) Network Availability of Raw/TCP 1074 Network TCP port number of Raw ALL 1075 Network Availability of LPD client ALL 1076 Network TCP port number of LPD ALL 1077 1078 Network LPD queue name Network Availability of IPP ALL ALL 1079 Network Availability of IPP port number “80” Network TCP port number of IPP ALL 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1080 Items November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Contents Procedure 5 <0-4096> 110 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> - NIC Maximum 96 letters NIC Maximum 96 letters NIC Unit: Minute 12 12 12 NIC 12 NIC Maximum 128 letters 12 21 <1-65535> 0 <0-65535> - UTY 12 UTY 12 SYS Maximum 31 letters SYS Maximum 31 letters 11 11 1 <1-2> 21 <1-65535> - NIC 1: Available 12 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 2: Not available 12 UTY 12 SYS Maximum 31 letters SYS Maximum 31 letters 11 11 1 <1-2> public private NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 NIC Maximum 31 letters NIC Maximum 31 letters 12 12 NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 ALL 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> - 12 ALL public UTY 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC Maximum 31 letters ALL 1 <1-2> 9100 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 515 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 631 <1-65535> NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 NIC 12 NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 NIC 12 NIC Maximum 31 letters NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 12 NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 NIC 12 ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 12 2 - 129 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification Items 1081 1082 1083 1084 Network Network Network Network 1085 1086 Network Network 1087 Network 1088 1089 Network Network IPP printer name IPP printer location IPP printer information IPP printer information (more) Installer of IPP printer driver IPP printer “Make and Model” IPP printer information (more) MFGR IPP message from operator Availability of FTP print 1090 1091 Network Printer user name of FTP Network Printer user password of FTP Network TCP port number to FTP print server Network Login name to Novell print server Network Login password to Novell print server Network Name of SearchRoot server Network Scan rate setting of print queue Network Page number limitation for printing text of received Email Network MDN return mail setting when receiving E-mail Network Trap destination of IPX ALL ALL 1100 Network Method of SMTP server authentication ALL 5 <1-5> 1101 ALL ALL 1103 Network Login name for SMTP server authentication Network Login password for SMTP server authentication Network Rendezvous setting 1104 1105 Network Link local host name Network Service name setting ALL ALL 1107 1108 Network FTP server login name 1 Network FTP server login password 1 ALL ALL 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1102 Contents Procedure ALL ALL ALL ALL - NIC NIC NIC NIC Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters 12 12 12 12 ALL ALL - NIC Maximum 127 letters NIC Maximum 127 letters 12 12 ALL - NIC Maximum 127 letters 12 ALL ALL 1 <1-2> print - NIC Maximum 127 letters NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 12 12 NIC Maximum 31 letters NIC Maximum 31 letters 12 12 21 NIC <1-65535> NIC Maximum 47 letters - 12 ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL - 12 NIC Maximum 31 letters 12 NIC Maximum 31 letters 5 NIC Unit: Second <1-255> UTY 5 <1-99> 12 12 2 <1-2> - UTY 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 12 - UTY Maximum 24 letters (Valid from 0 to 9 and from A to F) NIC 1: Plain 2: Login 3; Cram-MD5 4: Digest MD5 5: Disable NIC Maximum 64 letters - NIC Maximum 64 letters 12 1 NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid <1-2> MFP_serial NIC Maximum 127 letters Refer to NIC Maximum 63 letters contents e-STUDIO3511: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO3511 e-STUDIO4511: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 Tiger UTY Maximum 64 letters Woods UTY Maximum 32 letters e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 130 05/05 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1109 1110 1111 Network FTP server login name 2 Network FTP server login password 2 Network POP Before SMTP setting ALL ALL ALL 1112 1114 Network Host name Network Sending mail text of InternetFAX Network SMB time-out period ALL ALL 1120 Network Backup/Restore of NIC setting information ALL 1124 1130 Network User interface User interface Workgroup name Job Build Function ALL ALL Maximum number of time job build performed ALL 1117 1131 Items ALL 1132 General Default screen selection of the User Function menu ALL 1135 Paper Default setting of drawers feeding (Printer/BOX) PRT 1136 ALL 1138 Network Number of lines simultaneously connectable when using SMB Network Memory partition size when using Samba Network LDAP search method setting 1139 Network LDAP authentication setting ALL 1140 User Restriction of the template interface function with the administrator privilege ALL 1145 Maintenance (Remote) Image processing Counter notification Remote FAX setting ALL Image quality control time accumulating counter ALL 1137 1370 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC ALL ALL Shigeki Maruyama 2 <1-2> MFP_serial 1 <0-1> 300 <1-9999> 0 <0-1> Contents UTY Maximum 64 letters UTY Maximum 32 letters NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid 12 12 12 NIC Maximum 63 letters SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 12 1 SYS Unit: Second 1 SYS 0: Read (Reads all of the setting information in NIC and create a file NAM1B (no extension) in USB) 1: Write (Writes all of the setting information read from a file NAM1B (no extension) in USB) workgroup UTY Maximum 15 letters 1 SYS Sets the Job Build Function. <0-1> 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS Sets the maximum number of time a 1000 <5-1000> job build has been performed. 5-1000: 5 to 1000 times 1 SYS Selects the default screen when <0-1> entering the User Function menu by pressing the [USER FUNCTIONS] button. 0: ADDRESS 1: COUNTER 1 SYS 1: LCF <1-5> 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer 13 SYS <0-16> SYS 8-20 M bytes 16 <8-20> SYS Sets the search method when 0 performing a LDAP search. <0-3> 0: Partial match 1: Prefix match 2: Suffix match 3: Full match 0 SYS 0: Not authenticated <0-1> 1: Authenticated SYS Selects the restriction of the template 0 <0-1> function usage setting. 0: No restriction 1: Only available with the administrator privilege. SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [MONITOR/PAUSE] button. 0 <8 digits> Procedure M Counts driving count of the drum (image quality control time). Counts up when drum motor and image quality control are ON. 1 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 2 - 131 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1371 Image Accumulated counter of process- output pages since the ing performing of image quality control Image Heater and energizing time process- accumulating counter ing Display/0 clearing ALL 0 <4 digits> M ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1378 Image Fuser roller ready process- temperature time ing accumulating counter ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1380 Image Fuser roller printing process- temperature time ing accumulating counter ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1382 Image Fuser roller energy saving process- temperature time ing accumulating counter Display/0 clearing ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1385 Image Number of output pages process- (Thick paper 1) ing ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1386 Image Number of output pages process- (Thick paper 2) ing ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1387 Image Number of output pages process- (Thick paper 3) ing ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1388 Image Number of output pages process- (OHP film) ing ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1389 Main charger Paper feeding Paper feeding ALL 0 <5 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> M 1372 1390 1391 Items Main charger wire cleaning counter display/0 clearing Feeding retry counter (upper drawer) Feeding retry counter (lower drawer) ALL ALL e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 132 04/09 M M Contents Procedure Cleared to “0” by the image quality closed-loop control. Counts up with the number of printing job received after this control. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (when power of the copier is ON) but does not count at the Sleep Mode. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (on standby). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (during printing). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (at energy saving mode). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Does not count up when cleaning is not effective. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer. 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1392 Paper Feeding retry counter feeding (PFP upper drawer) ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1393 Paper Feeding retry counter feeding (PFP lower drawer) ALL 0 <8 digits> M 1394 Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Counter Feeding retry counter (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter (LCF) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (LCF) Black toner cartridge drive counts/0 clearing Counter Counter for tab paper ALL 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> <8 digits> M ALL 0 <8 digits> M Image processing Image processing Toner cartridge wrong installation detection ON/ OFF setting Detection/control that the toner cartridge is nearly empty ALL 0 <0-1> M ALL 1 <0-1> M Threshold for detecting that black toner cartridge is nearly empty Mode only for Private Print ALL <8 digits> M 1432 Image processing Network ALL 1433 Network "Disable e-Filing" function ALL 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 1434 Network "Disable local file save" function ALL 0 <0-1> 1484 Network Authentication method of "Scan to Email" ALL 0 <0-2> 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1410 1412 1414 1415 1416 Items November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL M M M M M M Contents Procedure Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF. When the number of feeding retry (08-1390 to 08-1395) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry continues regardless of the counter setting value. Refer to (Note 1). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 M 1 Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is reset, this counter is reset in sync at the PM support mode. 0: ON 1: OFF 1 Sets ON or OFF of the detection/ control that the toner cartridge is nearly empty. 0: OFF 1: ON 1 SYS 0: Normal mode 1: Mode for Private Print SYS 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) SYS 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) SYS 0: Disable 1: SMTP authentication 2: LDAP authentication 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 133 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1485 Network Setting whether use of Internet FAX is permitted or not when it is given an authentication Network Server setting for LDAP user authentication ALL 1487 Network "From" address assignment method when it is given an authentication ALL 1488 Network ID setting of LDAP server for "From" address assignment ALL 1489 Network Setting for "From" address edit at "Scan to Email" Network E-mail domain name ALL 1486 1491 Items 1800-0 Y Image Color toner forced process- supply time 1800-1 ing setting M 1800-2 C 1801 Image processing 1802-0 Image processing 1802-1 1802-2 Color toner forced supply count setting Start up setting of the developer material stabilizing mode. ALL ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) 0 <0-1> Contents SYS 0: Not permitted 1: Permitted 0 SYS <04294967295> 0 SYS 0: "User name" + @ + "Domain name" 1: LDAP search <0-2> 2: Use the address registered in "From" field of E-mail setting 0 SYS <04294967295> 0 SYS 0: Not permitted <0-1> 1: Permitted SYS 96+2 (delimiter) character ASCII sequence only 70 M Sets the motor driving time of the <0-255> developer unit at the time of the color M toner forced supply. 70 <0-255> 0-255: Setting value x 0.1 seconds M 70 <0-255> M Sets the number of times of the color 7 toner forced supply. <1-10> Level ALL 3 <2-8> M Pattern interval ALL 50 <0-100> M Number of repeating time ALL 10 <0-20> M Sets the performing level of the developer material stabilizing operation. Set the interval time between performances of developer material stabilizing operation. Set the number of repeating times of the developer material stabilizing operation. Procedure 1 2 1 2 1 11 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 (Note 1) In this equipment, a toner image is formed on the transfer belt prior to a paper feeding. When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed, the toner image on the transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process. After that, the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited. In this case, the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on the transfer belt is already cleaned off, even though the printing is normally completed. Therefore, note that the excessive toner will be consumed consequently when the upper limit value of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as “0” (no limit). The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the roller at earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 134 05/05 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC < > ( Chapter 2.2.6) Note: In the pixel counter function, the twin color copy mode is regarded as the full color mode. Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1500 Pixel Standard paper size setting counter ALL 1501 Pixel Pixel counter all clearing counter Pixel Service technician reference counter counter clearing ALL 1503 Pixel Toner cartridge reference counter counter clearing ALL 1504 Pixel Pixel counter display setting counter ALL 1505 Pixel Displayed reference setting counter ALL 1506 Pixel Toner empty determination counter counter setting ALL 1507 Pixel Threshold setting for toner counter empty determination (Output pages) Pixel Threshold setting for toner counter empty determination (Pixel counter) Pixel Pixel counter clear flag/ counter Service technician reference ALL Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter ALL - ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL - ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) - 1502 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 Items Service technician reference cleared date Toner cartridge reference cleared date (Y) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (M) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (C) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (K) Toner cartridge reference count started date (Y) Toner cartridge reference count started date (M) Toner cartridge reference count started date (C) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 0 <0-1> - Contents SYS Selects the standard paper size to convert it into the pixel count (%). 0: A4 1: LT SYS Clears all information related to the pixel counter. SYS Clears all information related to the service technician reference pixel counter. SYS Clears all information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel counter. 1 SYS Selects whether or not to display the <0-1> pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Displayed 1: Not displayed 0 SYS Selects the reference when display<0-1> ing the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Service technician reference 1: Toner cartridge reference 0 SYS Selects the counter to determine <0-1> toner empty. 0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter 500 SYS Sets the number of output pages to <0-999> determine toner empty. This setting is valid when “0” is set at 08-1506. 21500 SYS Sets the number of output pages to <0-60000> determine toner empty. This setting is valid when “1” is set at 08-1506. 0 SYS Becomes “1” when 08-1502 is <0-1> performed. ALL ALL ALL - - SYS Displays the date on which 08-1502 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. Procedure 1 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 - 135 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Setting mode (08) Code Classification Items 1518 Pixel counter Pixel counter Toner cartridge reference count started date (K) Number of output pages/full color (Service technician reference) 1547 Default Func- ALL - PPC <8 digits> (color) 1548 Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Service technician reference) PPC <8 digits> (black) 1549 Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (Service technician reference) PRT <8 digits> (color) 1550 Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Service technician reference) PRT <8 digits> (black) 1551 Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Service technician reference) FAX <8 digits> (black) 1552 Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference) PPC <8 digits> (color) 1553 Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Toner cartridge reference) PPC <8 digits> (black) 1554 Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference) PRT <8 digits> (color) 1555 Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Toner cartridge reference) PRT <8 digits> (black) 1556 Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Toner cartridge reference) FAX <8 digits> (black) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 136 Contents SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Procedure 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1557 Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) 2 1558 Pixel counter 2 1559 Pixel counter 1560 Pixel counter 1561 Pixel counter 1562 Pixel counter 1563 Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter 1564 1565 1566 1577 1578 Pixel counter 1579 Pixel counter Items Contents PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (Y) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (M) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (M) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (C) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (C) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Toner cartridge Y ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the replacement counter (color) toner cartridge Y replacement. Toner cartridge M ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the replacement counter (color) toner cartridge M replacement. Toner cartridge C ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the replacement counter (color) toner cartridge C replacement. Toner cartridge K ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the replacement counter toner cartridge K replacement. 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in Average pixel count/full color PPC (color) <0-10000> (Y+M+C+K) (Service the copy function, full color mode, all technician reference) toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Average pixel count/full color PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (Y) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, reference) toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Average pixel count/full PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in color (M) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, reference) toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Procedure 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 - 137 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1580 0 Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (C) (Service technician the copy function, full color mode, (color) <0-10000> toner C and service technician reference) reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, reference) toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, technician reference) all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (M) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (C) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color technician reference) (color) mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (M) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (C) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/black PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Service technician refer(black) <0-10000> the copy function, black mode and ence) service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 Items e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 138 Contents Procedure 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification 1593 Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) 1594 Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) 1595 Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) 1596 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service technician reference) 1597 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Service technician reference) 1598 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Service technician reference) 1599 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Service technician reference) 1600 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Service technician reference) 1601 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service technician reference) 1602 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Service technician reference) 1603 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Service technician reference) 1604 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Service technician reference) 1605 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Service technician reference) Items November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default Func- Contents PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the printer function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT/ <0-10000> the copy/printer/FAX function, black FAX mode and service technician (black) reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the PPC (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Procedure 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 - 139 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Code Classification 1606 Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) 1607 Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) 1608 Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) 1609 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) 1610 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) 1611 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) 1612 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference) 1613 Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) 1614 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K)+black (Toner cartridge reference) 1615 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) 1616 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) 1617 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) 1618 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference) Items Default Func- Contents PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> printer function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in <0-10000> the copy function, full color/black mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 140 Procedure 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification 1619 Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) 1620 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K)+black (Toner cartridge reference) 1621 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) 1622 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) 1623 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) 1624 Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K)+black (Toner cartridge reference) 1625 Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) 1626 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) 1627 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Toner cartridge reference) 1628 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Toner cartridge reference) 1629 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Toner cartridge reference) 1630 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) 1631 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Items November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Default Func- Contents 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT the printer function, black mode and (black) <0-10000> toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in <0-10000> the printer function, full color/black mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT/ <0-10000> the copy/printer/FAX function, black FAX mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Procedure 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 - 141 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Default Func- Code Classification 1632 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Toner cartridge reference) 1633 Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Toner cartridge reference) 1634 Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) 1639 Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) 1640 Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) Items Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (Y) 1641-1 5.1-10% 1641-2 10.1-15% 1641-3 15.1-20% 1641-4 20.1-25% 1641-5 25.1-30% 1641-6 30.1-40% 1641-7 40.1-60% 1641-8 60.1-80% 1641-9 80.1-100% 1641-0 0-5% Contents PRT SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the 0 (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> printer function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into (color) 10 ranges. The number of output PPC <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In (color) this code, the distributions in the PPC <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and (color) toner Y are displayed. [Unit: page] PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 142 Procedure 2 2 2 2 2 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification Default Func- Items Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (M) 1642-1 5.1-10% 1642-2 10.1-15% 1642-3 15.1-20% 1642-4 20.1-25% 1642-5 25.1-30% 1642-6 30.1-40% 1642-7 40.1-60% 1642-8 60.1-80% 1642-9 80.1-100% 1642-0 0-5% Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (C) 1643-1 5.1-10% 1643-2 10.1-15% 1643-3 15.1-20% 1643-4 20.1-25% 1643-5 25.1-30% 1643-6 30.1-40% 1643-7 40.1-60% 1643-8 60.1-80% 1643-9 80.1-100% 1643-0 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 0-5% PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) Contents Procedure <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner M are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner C are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 2 - 143 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Code Classification Default Func- Items Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (K) 1644-1 5.1-10% 1644-2 10.1-15% 1644-3 15.1-20% 1644-4 20.1-25% 1644-5 25.1-30% 1644-6 30.1-40% 1644-7 40.1-60% 1644-8 60.1-80% 1644-9 80.1-100% 1644-0 0-5% Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (Y) 1645-1 5.1-10% 1645-2 10.1-15% 1645-3 15.1-20% 1645-4 20.1-25% 1645-5 25.1-30% 1645-6 30.1-40% 1645-7 40.1-60% 1645-8 60.1-80% 1645-9 80.1-00% 1645-0 0-5% PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) Contents Procedure <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner K are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner Y are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 144 14 14 14 14 14 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code Classification Default Func- Items Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (M) 1646-1 5.1-10% 1646-2 10.1-15% 1646-3 15.1-20% 1646-4 20.1-25% 1646-5 25.1-30% 1646-6 30.1-40% 1646-7 40.1-60% 1646-8 60.1-80% 1646-9 80.1-100% 1646-0 0-5% Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (C) 1647-1 5.1-10% 1647-2 10.1-15% 1647-3 15.1-20% 1647-4 20.1-25% 1647-5 25.1-30% 1647-6 30.1-40% 1647-7 40.1-60% 1647-8 60.1-80% 1647-9 80.1-100% 1647-0 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 0-5% PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) Contents Procedure <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner M are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner C are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 2 - 145 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Setting mode (08) Code 1648-0 1648-1 Classification Default Func- Items Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (K) 0-5% 5.1-10% 1648-2 10.1-15% 1648-3 15.1-20% 1648-4 20.1-25% 1648-5 25.1-30% 1648-6 30.1-40% 1648-7 40.1-60% 1648-8 60.1-80% 1648-9 80.1-100% 1649-0 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black 0-5% 1649-1 5.1-10% 1649-2 10.1-15% 1649-3 15.1-20% 1649-4 20.1-25% 1649-5 25.1-30% 1649-6 30.1-40% 1649-7 40.1-60% 1649-8 60.1-80% 1649-9 80.1-100% PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) Contents Procedure <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner K are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 146 14 14 14 14 14 14 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Setting mode (08) Code 1650-0 Classification Default Func- Items Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black 0-5% 1650-1 5.1-10% 1650-2 10.1-15% 1650-3 15.1-20% 1650-4 20.1-25% 1650-5 25.1-30% 1650-6 30.1-40% 1650-7 40.1-60% 1650-8 60.1-80% 1650-9 80.1-100% 1651-0 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black 0-5% 1651-1 5.1-10% 1651-2 10.1-15% 1651-3 15.1-20% 1651-4 20.1-25% 1651-5 25.1-30% 1651-6 30.1-40% 1651-7 40.1-60% 1651-8 60.1-80% 1651-9 80.1-100% November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) Contents Procedure <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the FAX <8 digits> SYS function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 <8 digits> SYS 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 2 - 147 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE < > The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08). The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table below. 0: Present number of output pages - Means the present number of output pages. 1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement - Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement. 2: Number of output pages at the last replacement - Means the number of output pages at the last replacement. 3: Present drive counts - Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds). 4: Recommended drive counts to be replaced - Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds). 5: Driving counts at the last replacement - Means the drive counts at the last replacement. 6: Present output pages for control - Means the present number of output pages for controlling. 7: Present drive counts for control - Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds). 8: Number of times replaced - Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen. Notes: • Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7. • When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice versa. • When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated to "0". e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 148 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Items PM management Date of previous setting replacement *Indicated in 8 digits Photoconductive drum 1150-0 to 8 1151 Drum cleaning blade 1158-0 to 8 1159 Drum cleaner brush 1166-0 to 8 1167 Main charger grid 1174-0 to 8 1175 Main charger wire 1182-0 to 8 1183 Main charger wire cleaning pad 1190-0 to 8 1191 Ozone filter 1198-0 to 8 1199 Developer material K 1200-0 to 8 1201 Developer material Y 1202-0 to 8 1203 Developer material M 1204-0 to 8 1205 Developer material C 1206-0 to 8 1207 1st transfer roller 1214-0 to 8 1215 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 116000/116000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 30000/37500 Sub-code 4: 28000/28000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 30000/37500 Sub-code 4: 28000/28000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 30000/37500 Sub-code 4: 28000/28000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 480000/600000 Sub-code 4: 1010000/1010000 2 - 149 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/05 Items PM management Date of previous setting replacement *Indicated in 8 digits Transfer belt 1228-0 to 8 1229 Transfer belt driving roller cleaning brush 1230-0 to 8 1231 Transfer belt cleaning blade 1232-0 to 8 1233 2nd transfer roller 1240-0 to 8 1241 2nd transfer roller cleaning brush 1244-0 to 8 1245 Pressure roller 1250-0 to 8 1251 Oil roller 1258-0 to 8 1259 Cleaning roller 1260-0 to 8 1261 Pressure roller separation finger 1270-0 to 8 1271 Fuser belt 1272-0 to 8 1273 Fuser belt guide 1276-0 to 8 1277 Pressure roller scraper 1278-0 to 8 1279 1282-0, 1, 2, 8 1283 Pickup roller (RADF) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 150 04/05 Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 480000/600000 Sub-code 4: 1010000/1010000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 240000/300000 Sub-code 4: 505000/505000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 337000/337000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 240000/300000 Sub-code 4: 312000/312000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 240000/300000 Sub-code 4: 312000/312000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Items PM management Date of previous setting replacement *Indicated in 8 digits Feed roller (RADF) 1284-0, 1, 2, 8 1285 Separation roller (RADF) 1286-0, 1, 2, 8 1287 Pickup roller (Upper drawer) 1290-0, 1, 2, 8 1291 Pickup roller (Lower drawer) 1292-0, 1, 2, 8 1293 Pickup roller (LCF) 1294-0, 1, 2, 8 1295 Feed roller (Upper drawer) 1298-0, 1, 2, 8 1299 Feed roller (Lower drawer) 1300-0, 1, 2, 8 1301 Feed roller (LCF) 1302-0, 1, 2, 8 1303 Separation roller (Upper drawer) 1306-0, 1, 2, 8 1307 Separation roller (Lower drawer) 1308-0, 1, 2, 8 1309 Separation roller (LCF) 1310-0, 1, 2, 8 1311 Separation roller (PFP upper drawer) 1312-0, 1, 2, 8 1313 Separation roller (PFP lower drawer) 1314-0, 1, 2, 8 1315 Separation roller (Bypass unit) 1316-0, 1, 2, 8 1317 Feed roller (PFP upper drawer) 1320-0, 1, 2, 8 1321 Feed roller (PFP lower drawer) 1322-0, 1, 2, 8 1323 Feed roller (Bypass unit) 1324-0, 1, 2, 8 1325 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 2 - 151 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE Items PM management Date of previous setting replacement *Indicated in 8 digits Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer) 1328-0, 1, 2, 8 1329 Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer) 1330-0, 1, 2, 8 1331 Pickup roller (Bypass unit) 1332-0, 1, 2, 8 1333 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 152 Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC < > 1. Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously. 2. Key in the code “257” and press the [START] button (the following is displayed). Note: Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values. 3. Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button. The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed. Note: The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] button.) • Key in “1” to copy the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B). (A) (B) (A) (B) • Key in “2” to copy the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A). 4. Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value. Note: The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the [CANCEL] button is pressed. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 153 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 04/09 2.2.6 Pixel counter (1) Outline Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size” is called Pixel count (%). This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge). (2) Factors affecting toner consumption Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal temperature and humidity. However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user. The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows: (a) Original/Data coverage (b) Original/Data density (c) Original/Print mode (d) Density setting Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 154 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption per output page in the copy Toner consumption Toner consumption function are as follows: Toner consumption Original density Toner consumption Original coverage TEXT /PHOTO TEXT PHOTO PRINTED IMAGE Original mode MAP Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual density density density density density density -5 -1 Center +1 +5 Density setting Fig. 2-203 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 155 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (3) Details of pixel counter (a) Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service technician reference. • Toner cartridge reference This is a system that accumulates data on each color between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next installation. The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output pages after the detection of toner empty has exceeded the threshold. The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507). When the new toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1503). • Service technician reference This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter. Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1502). (b) Print count (number of output pages) The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper sizes to the standard size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by paper area ratio. The standard size is set in the setting mode (08-1500). The examples of conversion are as follows: Ex.) 1. “1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size. 2. “2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%) 3. “1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%) 4. “1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 156 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (c) Pixel count (%) Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper. The examples of pixel count are as follows: Note: In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4 margins, it never becomes 100% actually. Ex.) 1. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) → Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5 2. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) → Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5 3. Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) → Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4 4. Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission → Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4 5. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) → Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4 6. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission → Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4 (d) Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%) There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%). 1. Average pixel count (%) The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and displayed. 2. Latest pixel count (%) The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 157 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (e) Type of calculated data Since this is multifunctional and color equipment, the data of pixel count is calculated for each function and color. The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08). See after-mentioned (5)-(c) for details. : With data : Without data Service technician reference Toner cartridge reference Full color/Twin color Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Total Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Black Copy function Printer function FAX function Total Table 2-201 Type of calculated data (f) Setting related with the pixel counter function (f-1) Standard paper size setting The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500). (f-2) Pixel counter display setting Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504). (f-3) Display reference setting The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or service technician reference) is selected (08-1505). (f-4) Determination counter of toner empty This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is detected. After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted. (f-5) Pixel counter clearing There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows: 08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared. 08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared. 08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 158 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption The user’s printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density setting may cause it as well. In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service. The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows: Number of output pages per cartridge (Page) Standard number of output pages (K) Y Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C) Y/2 X X/2 Y/10 X/10 6% 12% 60% Pixel count (%) Fig. 2-204 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 159 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (5) Pixel counter confirmation (a) Display on LCD screen Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505). The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and [PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above and the power is, as usual, turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the setting of 08-1505.) Table 2-205 Reference selection screen When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is displayed. [TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed. [SERVICE (COLOR)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (full color) is displayed. [SERVICE (BLACK)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (black) is displayed. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 160 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC The following screen is displayed when pressing the [TONER CARTRIDGE] button. Table 2-206 Information screen of toner cartridge reference The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button. Table 2-207 Information screen of service technician reference (full color) The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button. Table 2-208 Information screen of service technician reference (black) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 161 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (b) Data list printing The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S). 9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed. 9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed. PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 2003.4.23 09:55 TONERCARTRIDGE No DATE 0 20030423 1 20030423 2 20030423 Col. Y Y Y Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] PPC 12345 12345 12345 PRN 23456 23456 23456 FAX ------- TOTAL 45678 45678 45678 9 20030423 10 20030423 11 20030423 K K K Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] 12345 12345 12345 23456 23456 23456 12345 12345 12345 45678 45678 45678 Table 2-209 Data list of toner cartridge reference PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 2003.4.23 09:55 SERVICEMAN No DATE 0 20030423 1 20030423 2 20030423 Col. Y Y Y Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] PPC 12345 12345 12345 PRN 23456 23456 23456 FAX ------- TOTAL 45678 45678 45678 9 20030423 10 20030423 11 20030423 K K K Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] 12345 12345 12345 23456 23456 23456 12345 12345 12345 45678 45678 45678 Table 2-210 Data list of service technician reference e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 162 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (c) Display in the setting mode (08) Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08). For details, see “2.2.5 Setting mode (08)”. (c-1) Print count, pixel count Full color/Twin color Copy function Printer function FAX function Total Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Average pixel count (%) Black Black (at color) + Black Yellow Magenta Cyan Black 1557 1559 1561 1552 1553 - 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1626 1627 1628 1629 1639 - 1558 1560 1562 1554 1555 - 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1630 1631 1632 1633 1640 - - - - - 1556 - - - - - 1625 - - - - - 1634 - 1621 1622 1623 - - 1624 Black Black Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (toner cartridge reference) Total Copy function Printer function FAX function Total Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Average pixel count (%) Full color/Twin color Yellow Magenta Cyan 1547 - - - - 1548 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1592 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1606 1549 - - - - 1550 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1593 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1607 - - - - - 1551 - - - - - 1594 - - - - - 1608 1587 1588 1598 1590 1591 1595 Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 163 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (c-2) Pixel count distribution Full color/Twin color Magenta Cyan Yellow Copy function Printer function FAX function Pixel count distribution (page) Pixel count distribution (page) Pixel count distribution (page) Black Black 1641 1642 1643 1644 1649 1645 1646 1647 1648 1650 - - - - 1651 Table 2-204 Pixel count code table Note: By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows. 0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25% 5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100% (c-3) Other information • Toner cartridge replacement counter The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. 08-1563: Toner cartridge Y 08-1564: Toner cartridge M 08-1565: Toner cartridge C 08-1566: Toner cartridge K • Toner cartridge reference count started date The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. 08-1515: Toner cartridge Y 05-1516: Toner cartridge M 08-1517: Toner cartridge C 05-1518: Toner cartridge K • Service technician reference cleared date The service technician reference cleared date (08-1510) is displayed. The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored. • Toner cartridge reference cleared date The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed. The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored. 08-1511: Toner cartridge Y 05-1512: Toner cartridge M 08-1513: Toner cartridge C 05-1514: Toner cartridge K e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 164 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2.2.7 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) Classification Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) User interface Scanner Image [Date/Time] 200, 638, 640 [Timer] 204, 205, 206, 260, 261, 262 [Screen] 207, 602, 1132 [File] 209, 218, 219, 264, 288 [Language] 220, 221 [Administrator] 263 [Scanning] 265, 266, 273, 274 [Box] 267, 270, 950, 976 [HDD] 271 [E-mail] 272, 1097, 1098 [Default setting] 275, 276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283, 284, 285, 286, 289, 331, 480, 503, 550, 585, 587, 588, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642, 986, 989, 1135, 1414, 1415, 1416, 1800-0 to 2, 1801-0 to 2 [Raw printing] 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 973, 978, 979 [Copy volume] 300 [Original counter] 302 [Automatic calibration] 595, 632 [AMS] 605 [Sound] 610, 969, 970 [Book duplexing] 611 [Summer time] 612 [Paper size] 613 [Department management] 617, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 672 [Sorting] 627, 634, 641, 649 [Original direction] 628 [Image shift] 636 [Color specification] 643, 644 [Edit copying] 645, 646 [Box printing] 647, 951, 953, 954 [X in 1] 650 [Annotation] 651, 657 [Automatic transferring] 660, 661 [Indicator] 671 [Priority drawer] 689 [Paper type] 697 [Offsetting between jobs] 682 [Job Build] 1130, 1131 [Image position] 305, 306 [Distortion] 308 [Reproduction ratio] 340, 884, 1060 [Carriage position] 359, 360 [Fixed value] 364, 363 [Margin] 430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 1, 435, 436, 437, 438, 439 [Image density] 501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719, 720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850, 851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862, 1550, 1551, 1552, 1553, 1554, 1560, 1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1570, 1571, 1572, 1573, 1574, 1580, 1581, 1582, 1583, 1584 [Range correction] 532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694, 695, 825, 826, 827, 828, 830, 831, 832, 833, 835, 836, 837, 838 [Color deviation correction] 417-0 to 3, 418-0 to 3 [Gamma adjustment] 580, 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1642, 1643 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC [Error diffusion / Dither] 502 [ACS] 268, 609-0 to 4 [Smoothing] 560, 561, 562 [Image quality] 586, 589 [Gamma correction] 597 2 - 165 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Classification Adjustment Mode (05) Image [Gamma balance] 590-0 to 2, 591-0 to 2, 592-0 to 2, 596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2, 599-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2, 882-0 to 2, 883-0 to 2 [Sharpness] 604, 605, 606, 840, 841, 842, 843, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1737, 1738, 1739, 1740, 1741, 1757 [Smudged/faint text] 648, 654, 655 [Toner saving] 664, 665, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058 [Pixel size] 663 [Smoothing] 667-0 to 4 [Binarization] 700, 701, 702 [Background adjustment] 848, 853, 858 [Color balance] 1010-0 to 2, 1011-0 to 2, 1012-0 to 2, 1013-0 to 2, 1014-0 to 2, 1015-0 to 2, 1016-0 to 2, 1017-0 to 2, 1018-0 to 2, 1019-0 to 2, 1020-0 to 2, 1021-0 to 2, 1022-0 to 2, 1023-0 to 2, 1024-0 to 2, 1025-0 to 2, 1026-0 to 2, 1027-0 to 2, 1028-0 to 2, 1029-0 to 2, 1030-0 to 2, 1031-0 to 2, 1032-0 to 2, 1033-0 to 2, 1034-0 to 2, 1035-0 to 2, 1036-0 to 2, 1037-0 to 2, 1038-0 to 2, 1039-0 to 2, 1040-0 to 2, 1041-0 to 2, 1779-0 to 2, 1780-0 to 2, 1781-0 to 2, 1782-0 to 2, 1783-0 to 2, 1784-0 to 2, 1785-0 to 2, 1786-0 to 2, 1787-0 to 2, 1788-0 to 2, 1789-0 to 2, 1790-0 to 2, 1791-0 to 2, 1792-0 to 2, 1793-0 to 2, 1794-0 to 2, 1795-0 to 2, 1796-0 to 2, 1797-0 to 2, 1798-0 to 2 [Toner amount] 1046-0 to 1, 1047-0 to 1, 1048-0 to 1, 1049-0 to 1, 1050-0 to 1, 1612, 1613, 1614, 1615, 1616 [ACS] 1065, 1066, 1675, 1676 [Background/Black density] 1070, 1071, 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077 [RGB] 1080, 1081, 1082 [Maximum text density] 1630, 1631, 1632, 1633 [Background processing] 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1694, 1695, 1696, 1697, 1698, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1702, 1708, 1709, 1710, 1711, 1712 [Highlight pen] 1769, 1770, 1771, 1772 [Reproduction level adjustment] 1725 [Black reproduction switching] 1761 [Contrast voltage] 330-0 to 3, 332-0 to 3, 380-0 to 3, 381-0 to 3, 1800-0 to 3, 1801-0 to 3, 1811-0 to 3, 1812-0 to 3, 1815-0 to 3 [Laser power] 331-0 to 3, 333-0 to 3, 382-0 to 3, 383-0 to 3, 384-0 to 3, 1802-0 to 3, 1803-0 to 3, 1816-0 to 3, 1817, 1819, 1820, 1821 [Main charger] 385-0 to 3, 1805-0 to 3, 1806-0 to 3, 1807-0 to 3, 1808-0 to 3, 1809-0 to 3, 1810-0 to 3 [Developer] 386-0 to 3 [Sensor] 388, 389, 390-0 to 3, 390-1 to 3, 392 [Temperature/Humidity] 393 Image control Setting Mode (08) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 166 05/05 [1st transfer] 541, 542, 543 [2nd transfer] 544, 545, 546, 548 [Setting] 549, 551 [Automatic starting] 559, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571, 572 [Drum] 552, 553 [Contrast voltage] 554, 556, 558 [Laser power] 555, 557 [Abnormality detection] 573, 574, 575, 576 [Counter] 1370, 1371 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Classification Image control Drive system Feeding system Laser Main charger Developer High-voltage transformer Transfer Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Performing] 394, 395, 396, 398-0 to 3 [Background voltage] 1804-0 to 3, 1813-0 to 3, 1814-0 to 3 [Main motor] 421, 422 [Exit motor] 424, 425 [Transport motor] 426, 427 [Aligning amount] 448-0 to 3, 449-0 to 3, 450-0 to 3, 452-0 to 3, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2, 460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3, 463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 3, 470-0 to 3, 471-0 to 3, 472-0 to 3, 473, 474-0 to 2, 475-0 to 9 [Paper pushing amount] 466-0 to 7, 467 [Polygonal motor] 401, 405 [Write start] 410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 494, 495, 496, 498-0 to 1 [Sideways deviation] 497-0 to 5 [Grid] 241, 242, 243, 244 [Auto-toner] 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206 [Color auto-toner] 207, 208 [Grid] 334, 335 [Color developer] 338, 339 [Black developer] 372, 373 [1st transfer] 250, 251 [2nd transfer] 252, 253, 254, 255 [1st transfer] 210, 211-0 to 3, 212, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218-0 to 3, 220-0 to 3, 221-0 to 3, 222-0 to 3, 223-0 to 3, 233, 245, 262-0 to 3, 263, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269-0 to 3, 271-0 to 3, 272-0 to 3, 273-0 to 3, 274-0 to 3, 1829-0 to 2, 1831, 1832, 1833, 1834, 1835, 1836, 1837, 1838-0 to 3, 1843, 1844-0 to 3 [2nd transfer] 224, 225, 226, 227-0 to 3, 229-0 to 3, 230-0 to 1, 231-0 to 1, 232-0 to 1, 234-0 to 3, 236-0 to 3, 237-0 to 1, 238-0 to 1, 239-0 to 1, 275, 276, 277-0 to 3, 279-0 to 3, 290-0 to 1, 291-0 to 1, 292-0 to 1, 293-0 to 4, 294-0 to 3, 296-0 to 3, 297-0 to 1, 298-0 to 1, 299-0 to 1, 1822-0 to 4, 1823-0 to 3, 1825-0 to 3, 1826-0 to 1, 1827-0 to 1, 1828-0 to 1, 1839-0 to 1, 1840-0 to 1, 1841-0 to 1, 1842-0 to 3, 1845-0 to 1 [Cleaning] 284, 285 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC [Paper dimension] 210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 470, 471 [Feeding setting] 254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659, 988 [Paper retry] 463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1, 466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482, 1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401 [Coated paper Mode] 675-0 to 4, 676, 677-0 to 5 [Paper size] 216, 217, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 256 [Blank copy prevention] 625 [Polygonal motor] 398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486, 488, 489, 490 [Cleaning] 511 [Color auto-toner] 819-0 to 2, 820-0 to 2, 822-0 to 2, 823-0 to 2, 824-0 to 2, 858-0 to 2, 859-0 to 2, 860-0 to 1, 861-0 to 1, 862-0 to 1, 863-0 to 1, 864, 865, 866-0 to 1, 867, 868, 869, 870, 871, 872, 873-0 to 2, 874, 875-0 to 2, 876-0 to 2, 877-0 to 2, 878-0 to 2, 879-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2 [Stabilization] 821 [Transfer] 810 [Cleaning] 487 2 - 167 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 Classification Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Status counter] 400 [Temperature] 409, 410-0 to 1, 411, 412-0 to 1, 413-0 to 1, 415-0 to 1, 416, 422, 428-0 to 1, 436, 437-0 to 1, 438-0 to 1 [Transport speed] 430, 431, 432 [Pre-running] 417-0 to 1, 439-0 to 1, 440-0 to 1, 441-0 to 1, 460, 461, 526-0 to 1, 583-0 to 2, 584 [Warming-up] 458, 459 [Fusing control switching] 849 [Switchback] 462 Fuser RADF Finisher Network [Aligning amount] 354, 355 [Sensor/EEPROM] 356, 367, 368 [Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366 [Binding/Folding position] 468-0 to 2 [Tray reset] 648 [Cascade] 652, 653 [NIC] 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1120 [IP address] 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010 [IPX] 1011, 1099 [Frame type] 1012 [NCP] 1013 [AppleTalk] 1014, 1015 [LDAP] 1016, 1138, 1139, 1486 [DNS] 1017, 1018, 1019 [DDNS] 1020 [SLP] 1021 [NetBios] 1023 [WINS] 1024, 1025 [Bindery] 1026 [NDS] 1027 [Directory] 1028, 1029 [HTTP] 1030, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1034, 1035 [SMTP] 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100, 1101, 1102 [Offramp] 1043, 1044, 1045 [POP3] 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052 [FTP] 1053, 1054, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092, 1107, 1108, 1109, 1110 [MIB] 1063 [Community] 1065, 1066 [TRAP] 1067, 1068, 1069, 1070 [Raw/TCP] 945, 1073, 1074 [LPD] 1075, 1076, 1077 [IPP] 1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088 [Novell] 1093, 1094 [SerchRoot] 1095 [Print queue] 1096 [ASCII code] 977 [Rendezvous] 1103 [Link local host name] 1104 [Service name] 1105 [Host name] 1112 [Internet FAX] 1114, 1485 [SMB] 1117, 1136 [Samba] 1137 [Workgroup name] 1124 [Private print] 1432 [Function] 1433, 1434 [Scan to E-mail] 1484 [From address] 1487, 1488, 1489 [E-mail domain] 1491 [External counter] 202, 381, 683, 975 [Counter copy] 257 [Paper size] 301-0 to 16, 303-0 to 16, 304-0 to 16, 305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16, 308-0 to 16, 309-0 to 16, 310-0 to 16, 311-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16, 314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16 Counter e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 168 05/05 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Classification Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Large/Small size] 317-0 to 2, 318-0 to 2, 319-0 to 2, 320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2, 323-0 to 2, 324-0 to 2, 325-0 to 2, 326-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2, 329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2, 333-0 to 2, 334-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2 [Double count] 344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353 [Paper source] 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374 [HDD] 390, 391, 392, 393 [Count method] 616, 663 [Department management] 629 [Fuser] 1372, 1378, 1380, 1382 [Paper type] 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1412 [Main charger] 1389 [Toner cartrige drive counts] 1410 [System] 900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 944 [Engine] 903, 905, 907, 908 [FAX] 915 [NIC] 916 [PM counter] 223, 251, 252, 375, 376 [Telephone] 250 [Error history] 253 [FSMS] 258, 999 [Service notification] 702, 703, 707, 710, 711, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 1145 [HTTP] 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731 [Supply order] 732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751, 752, 753, 754, 755, 756, 757, 758, 759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765, 794, 795 [Downloading] 797 [Destination] 201, 701 [Line] 203 [Private] 259 [Local I/F] 614 [Memory] 615 [Partition] 662, 666, 667 [Clearing] 665, 669, 693 [Database] 684, 685, 686 [HDD] 670, 690, 691, 694 [Control panel] 692 [Scrambler board] 696, 698, 699 [Equipment number] 995 [Speed switching] 497 [Banner] 678, 679, 680 [Message button] 681 [Initialization] 947 [Mode setting] 948, 949 [Template] 1140 Counter Version Maintenance Others [Equipment number] 976 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 169 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 05/05 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 170 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3. ADJUSTMENT 3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment) This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing components which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to be obeyed in priority. In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary. Parts to be replaced Laser optical unit Drum Drum cleaning blade Main charger wire Drum cleaner brush Main charger grid Developer material Item to be adjusted 3.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner sensor Code in mode 05 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206 Item to be adjusted 3.3 Adjustment of image quality control / Automatic initialization of image quality control Code in mode 05 396 Transfer belt 1st transfer roller 2nd transfer roller Image guality sensor 3.4 Image dimensional adjustment Order Items 1 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 2 3 4 5 6 7 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment 8 (g) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing (a) Image distortion 3.4.4 (b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction Scanner (c) Image location of primary scanning direction related adjustment (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (e) Image location of secondary scanning direction (f) Top margin (g) Right margin (h) Bottom margin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction Primary scanning data laser writing start position Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment Secondary scanning data laser writing start position Item to be adjusted 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PPC) 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PRT) Code in mode 05 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463 401 411 421 284 285 441, 440, 444 443, 442, 445 498 – 405 306 340 305 430 432 433 Code in mode 05 1642, (1643, 580) 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003 Adjust the image quality if necessary. Chapter 3.5, 3.6, 3.7) ( END November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3-1 04/05 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure. (1) Install the cleaner and developer unit. Note: Do not install the toner cartridge. (2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be displayed. 100% [0] [5] [POWER] (3) → A TEST MODE Key in a code and press the [START] button. Code 200: All developer materials 201: Developer material Y 202: Developer material M 203: Developer material C 204: Developer material K 206: Developer material Y, M, C 100% (Code) → (4) A3 [START] → 200 A3 TEST MODE Adjustment for “K” (Magnetometric sensor control) • The following message will be displayed approx. 2 minutes later. (B) → (C) → (A) → K: xxxV K: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltage (V) (C): No display (A): Target values (V) for adjustment reference voltage Note: The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A). e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3-2 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC • In 30 to 60 seconds, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged. Then the sensor output control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C). (B) → K: xxxV (C) → K: yyy (A) → K: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltage (V) (C): Sensor output control value (bit value) (A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage Note: Be careful that the values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity. • In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is automatically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. (5) Adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” (light sensor control) • In 15 to 45 seconds, the following message will be displayed (The time varies with the number of colors to be adjusted). (B) → (C) → (A) → Y: Y: (B): Current sensor voltage (V) (C): No display (A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage Note: The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A). • After approx. 5 seconds have passed, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged. Then the sensor output control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C). (B) → Y: xxxV (C) → Y: yyy (A) → Y: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltage (V) (C): Sensor output control value (bit value) (A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3-3 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT • In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is automatically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. When the adjustments of all colors have finished and [ENTER] is lit, press [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory. (6) Standard of adjustment value range (A): Adjustment reference voltages (V) K Y M C 29.9 or below Humidity(%) 2.47 1.25 1.25 1.25 30.0-44.9 45.0-59.9 2.49 2.50 60.0-74.9 75.0 or above 2.69 2.86 Note: Since the adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correction is not performed. (B): Current sensor voltages (V) Humidity(%) K Y M C 29.9 or below 30.0-44.9 2.37-2.57 2.39-2.59 1.15-1.35 1.15-1.35 1.15-1.35 45.0-59.9 60.0-74.9 2.40-2.60 2.59-2.79 75.0 or above 2.76-2.96 Note: Since the adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correction is not performed. (7) Turn the power OFF. (8) Install the toner cartridges. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3-4 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.3 Performing Image Quality Control (1) When unpacking Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the “Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)” procedure. (2) When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the “Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)” procedure. • • • • Photoconductive drum Image quality sensor 2nd transfer roller Drum cleaning blade • • • • Developer material Transfer belt Main charger Drum cleaner brush • Laser optical unit • 1st transfer roller • Main charger grid Note: When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in addition, “Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)” should be done first. (3) When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in cases no parts written above are replaced, do the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395)” procedure before "Automatic gamma adjustment". Code 395 Item to be adjusted Contents Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → Adjustment Mode (2) Key in [395] and press the [START] button. (3) "WAIT" is displayed. (4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns to the initial state of Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to “5. TROUBLESHOOTING”. 396 Automatic initialization of image quality control (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → Adjustment Mode (2) Key in [396] and press the [START] button. (3) "WAIT" is displayed. (4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment will return to initial state of the Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to “5. TROUBLESHOOTING”. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3-5 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment 3.4.1 General description There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this image dimensional adjustment, perform the "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)". When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed. Item to be adjusted Code in mode 05 1 Paper alignment at the registration roller 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 3 Scanner related adjustment 2 Printer related adjustment 462, 463 (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction 401 (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed) (b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position 411 (c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed) 421 (d) Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment (e) Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment 284 285 (f) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position 441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445 (g) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing (a) Image distortion 498 – (b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (c) Image location of primary scanning direction (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 405 306 340 (e) Image location of secondary scanning direction (f) Top margin 305 430 (g) Right margin (h) Bottom margin 432 433 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3-6 04/02 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC [Procedure to key in adjustment values] In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button, immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed (normal copy mode). Varies with the code “XXX” keyed in. A 100% 0 A3 TEST MODE 5 POWER 1 Code No. Digital keys : Key in codes. XXX 100% START A3 TEST MODE Digital keys : Key in adjustment values. ( CLEAR Use to make corrections) Value ZZZ is stored replacing values YYY. ENTER or YYY ZZZ Adjustment value newly keyed in. (If no entering, YYY is displayed.) Current adjustment value 100% A A3 A A3 A A3 TEST MODE INTERRUPT FAX Test copy 100% Wait Warming Up START If the test copy does not satisfy the specified values, return to step 1 and repeat the adjustment procedure. 100% COPYING Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3-7 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05). Weight Upper Lower type Plain 64-80 g/m2 drawer 450 (*4) drawer 452 (*4) drawer 448 (*4) drawer 449 (*4) paper Thick 17-20 lb. 81-105 g/m2 469 (*4) 470 (*4) 471 (*4) paper 1 Thick 21-28 lb. 106-163 g/m2 - - paper 2 Thick 29-43 lb. 164-209 g/m2 - 44-55 lb. - - Paper paper 3 OHP film PFP upper PFP lower ADU Bypass feed 457 455 (*1) Black Color 458 (*1) 472 (*4) 473 474 (*1) 460 (*1) - - - - 461 (*1) 475 (*3) - - - - - 462 (*2) 475 (*3) - - - - - 463 (*1) 475 (*3) Sub-code (*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size (*2) 0: Long size 1: Middle size (*3) 0: Long size of thick paper 2 2: Short size of thick paper 2 4: Middle size of thick paper 3 6: Long size of OHP film 8: Short size of OHP film (*4) 0: Long size 1: Middle size LCF 2: Short size 2: Short size 3: Post card 1: Middle size of thick paper 2 3: Long size of thick paper 3 5: Short size of thick paper 3 7: Middle size of OHP film 9: Post card 2: Short size 1 3: Short size 2 Notes: 1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer) Middle size: 220-329 mm (8.7-12.9 inches) Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter) Short size 1: 205-219 mm (8.1-8.6 inches or shorter) Short size 2: 204 mm or shorter (8.0 inches or shorter) 2. The adjustment of “Post card” is for Japan only. (Not necessary for LCF) [0] [5] [Power] (Code) [START] (Sub-code) [SET] or [INTERRUPT] Stores in memory e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT [START] value ( Current displayed ) [Drawer selection] 3-8 04/05 new ( Enter ) value (*5) + [FAX] (Test print) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (*5) 1: 3: 55: 56: 57: 58: 59: 60: Single-sided grid pattern in Black Mode Double-sided grid pattern in Black Mode Grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Full Color Mode Grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Full Color Mode Grid pattern of OHP film in Full Color Mode Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Black Mode Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Black Mode Single-sided grid pattern of OHP film in Black Mode Note: If the aligning amount is too large, abnormal noise (paper-folding noise) or actual paper folding may occur during paper feeding. If the aligning amount is too small, on the other hand, a skew, an image dislocation in feeding direction or a paper exit jam (E010) may occur. Pay attention to the above and select the appropriate value. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3-9 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer)) 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [401]) → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) → "100% A" is displayed. → Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/step). (b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer) 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [411]) → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) → "100% A" is displayed → Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). 6. After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the code 410. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [410]) → [START] → (Key in the same value in the step 5 above) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) Note: Make sure the 1st line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 10 04/09 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed (Printer)) 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of the grid pattern. * Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed. 4. Check if the distance C is within 200±0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [426]) → [START] * Confirm that the input value is [153]. If not, key in [153]. → (Key in [153]) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) → (Key in the code [421]) → [START] → (Key in a value (recommended values: 110 to 140 / acceptable values: 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * When the value is not within the recommended values, the trailing edge area of the image may be out of position for the paper length or the density at the trailing edge area of the image may become lower. Perform the adjustment confirming the image. → “100% A” is displayed → Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.5 mm/6 steps). (d) Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment This adjustment has to be performed after “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (421)”. Acceptable values are 88 to 168. The larger the value is, the later the transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing becomes. 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. According to the input value for “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (421)”, key in the value shown in the following table. * Be sure to key in the correct value because incorrect value may reduce the cleaning efficiency of the transfer belt. Adjustment (code) Input value Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (421) 110 111-120 121-130 131-140 Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment (284) 147 143 141 137 (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [284]) → [START] → (Key in a value) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 11 04/09 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT (e) Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment This adjustment has to be performed after “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (421)” Acceptable values are 88 to 168. The larger the value is, the later the transfer belt cleaning unit release timing becomes. 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. According to the input value for “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (421)”, key in the value shown in the following table. * Be sure to key in the correct value because incorrect value may reduce the cleaning efficiency of the transfer belt. Adjustment (code) Input value Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (421) 110 111-120 121-130 131-140 Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment (285) 147 143 141 137 (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [285]) → [START] → (Key in a value) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) (f) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source. The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and acceptable values. Order for adjustment 1 2 Paper source Lower drawer Upper drawer 3 4 PFP or LCF Bypass feed 5 Duplexing 441 440 Paper size A3/LD A4/LT Acceptable value 0 to 80 0 to 40 444/443 442 A4/LT A4/LT 0 to 40 0 to 40 445 A3/LD 0 to 40 Code Remarks Paper fed from the lower drawer 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10mm squares is printed out.) 3. Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. * Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed. * At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code shown above) → [START] → (Key in an acceptable value shown above) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) → "100% A" is displayed → Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.2 mm/step). e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 12 04/09 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (g) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished. (g-1) Adjustment for long-sized paper 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [3] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [498]) → [START] → [0] → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) → "100% A" is displayed. → Press [3] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). (g-2) Adjustment for short-sized paper 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [3] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper drawer.) 3. Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [498]) → [START] → [1] → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) → "100% A" is displayed → Press [3] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 13 04/02 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 1 21 A 6 C 22 Feeding direction 6 D 2 B, E [Grid pattern] Fig. 3-401 [0] [5] [Power ON] → [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) → [FAX] A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) → 200±0.5 mm (0.05 mm/step) B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) → Key in the same value for 05-410. C: 05-421 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) → 200±0.5 mm (0.5 mm/6 steps) D: 05-440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT) → 52±0.5 mm (0.2 mm/step), 441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 443 (LCF, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD) E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) 498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT) e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 14 04/09 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment (a) Image distortion Feeding direction Step 1 A B Feeding direction Step 2 D C Fig. 3-402 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear) 2. Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper. 3. Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position. 4. Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2. Step 1 In case of A: Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW). In case of B: Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CCW). Carriage-2 Fig. 3-403 Adjustment screw for the mirror-1 (Rear) Step 2 In case of C: Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW). In case of D: Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CCW). 5. Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas) - Recommended screw lock agent Manufacturer: Three Bond Product name: 1401E November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Carriage-1 Fig. 3-404 3 - 15 04/09 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT The following adjustments (b) to (e) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1. (Refer to page 3-19.) (b) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo. 4. Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [405]) → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255) with digital keys) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step). (c) Image location of primary scanning direction 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo. 4. Measure the distance B from the left paper edge to the 5 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance B is within 5±0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [306]) → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo. 4. Measure the distance C between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance C is within 150±0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [340]) → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.3 mm/step). e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 16 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC (e) Image location of secondary scanning direction 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo. 4. Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance D is within 10±0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [305]) → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values : 92 to 164)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.14 mm/step). (f) Top margin 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Open the platen cover or RADF. 3. Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3±0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [430]) → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) → (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). Feeding direction E Fig. 3-405 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 17 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT (g) Right margin 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Open the platen cover or RADF. 3. Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [432]) → [START] → (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). → (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). Feeding direction F Fig. 3-406 (h) Bottom margin 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode) 2. Open platen cover or RADF. 3. Press the [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above. (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [433]) → [START] → (Key in value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory) → (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). Feeding direction G Fig. 3-407 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 18 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC D C Feeding direction B A Fig. 3-408 Chart TCC-1 [0] [5] [Power ON] → (Chart TCC-1) → [FAX] → [START] (A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo) A: 05-405 → 200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step) B: 05-306 → 5±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) C: 05-340 → 150±0.5 mm (0.3 mm/step) D: 05-305 → 10±0.5 mm (0.14 mm/step) November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 19 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT [9] [8] [1] [3] [10] [5] [2] [2] TOSHIBA COLOR CHART [7] No.TCC-1 [3] [2] [1] [1] [6] [6] [4] [3] [14] [11] [7] [7] [2] [12] [7] [13] [1] [8] Fig. 3-409 [1] [2] [3] [4] Grid patterns YMCK patches Resolution patterns Gradation pattern : : : : [5] Color registration pattern [6] Pictures [7] Magnification lines : : : [8] Center lines [9] Arrow : : [10] [11] [12] [13] Halftone band : White text on the black solid : Text : Thin lines : [14] Note area e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT : For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section For checking uniformity For checking resolution Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K) Coverage: 10-100% For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance For checking color registration For checking color reproduction and moire For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary scanning directions Center lines for A4/LT sizes A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass (place it to the left rear corner of the original glass.) For checking uniformity For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid For checking reproduction of text For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100µm) For recording the date, conditions, etc. 3 - 20 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts replacement. (1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been or replaced, be sure to make this adjustment: • Laser optical unit • Photoconductive drum • Developer material • Main charger wire • Main charger grid • Transfer belt • 1st transfer roller • Drum cleaning blade • Drum cleaner brush • Image guality sensor (2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to determine if adjustment is necessary: • 2nd transfer roller Notes: 1. Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment". 2. Normally, only the adjustment of color/black integrated pattern is needed. When the adjustment of "3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting" is made, color pattern and black pattern need to be adjusted individually. Code 1642 (1643) (580) Item to be adjusted Automatic gamma adjustment Contents (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → Adjustment Mode (2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button to output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”. Pattern No. Pattern Remarks 4 Color/black integrated When performing code 1642 10* Black When performing code 580 5* Color When performing code 1643 * This adjustment is performed only when "3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting" is performed. Usually, only the adjustment with the color/black integrated pattern (05-1642) is performed. (3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass. In the cases of patterns 4 and 5, place the chart aligning its side with 2 black squares against the original scale. In the case of pattern 10, place the chart aligning its black side of the gradation pattern against the original scale. (4) Key in a code and press the [START] button. → The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.). (5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown. Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected. (To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.) In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown. Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 21 04/05 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.5.2 Density adjustment The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as follows. Color mode Text/Photo 1550 1551 1561 Printed Image 1552 1562 Photo 1553 1563 1570 1580 1571 1581 1572 1582 1573 1583 Item to be adjusted Map 1554 1564 Full Color 1560 Original mode Text 1574 1584 Remarks Manual density mode The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. center value Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) Manual density mode The larger the value is, the dark step value darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) Manual density mode The larger the value is, the light step value lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) Automatic density mode The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) Color mode Text/Photo Original mode Text Photo 503 504 501 Item to be Remarks adjusted Manual density mode The larger the value is, the center value darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) Manual density mode The larger the value is, the 508 510 509 dark step value darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 Black (Default: 20) Manual density mode The larger the value is, the 505 507 506 light step value Automatic density 514 515 512 mode lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 22 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing "3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment". (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in a code and press the [START] button. (3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255). (To correct the value once keyed in , press the [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. → The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy. (6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5). November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 23 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.5.3 Color balance adjustment The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color at the Full Color Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density. Color Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Original mode Text Printed Image Photo 1780-0 1781-0 1782-0 1780-1 1781-1 1782-1 Map 1783-0 1783-1 Item to be adjusted Low density Medium density 1779-2 1784-0 1780-2 1785-0 1781-2 1786-0 1782-2 1787-0 1783-2 1788-0 High density Low density 1784-1 1784-2 1785-1 1785-2 1786-1 1786-2 1787-1 1787-2 1788-1 1788-2 Medium density High density 1789-0 1789-1 1790-0 1790-1 1791-0 1791-1 1792-0 1792-1 1793-0 1793-1 Low density Medium density 1789-2 1794-0 1790-2 1795-0 1791-2 1796-0 1792-2 1798-0 1793-2 1798-0 High density Low density 1794-1 1794-2 1795-1 1795-2 1796-1 1796-2 1798-1 1798-2 1798-1 1798-2 Medium density High density Text/Photo 1779-0 1779-1 Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the color to be adjusted becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”. (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START] button. (3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] button. 0 : Low density (L) 1 : Medium density (M) 2 : High density (H) (4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.) (5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. → The equipment goes back to the ready state. (6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5). (7) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy. (8) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7). e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 24 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.5.4 Gamma balance adjustment The density adjustment at the Black Mode is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density. Original mode Color mode Black Item to be Text/Photo Text Photo adjusted 590-0 591-0 592-0 Low density 590-1 591-1 592-1 Medium density 590-2 591-2 592-2 High density Remarks The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”. Procedure is same as that of “3.5.3 Color balance adjustment”. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 25 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.5.5 Offsetting adjustment for background processing The density of background and text can be adjusted as follows. Color mode Text/Photo 1688 Text 1689 Original mode Printed Image Photo 1690 1691 Map 1692 Item to be adjusted Automatic density The larger the value is, the adjustment for background darker the background becomes. (Automatic) Remarks Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) 1694 1695 1696 1697 Full Color 1693 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 Automatic density adjustment for The larger the value is, the darker the text becomes. text (Automatic) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. Manual density (Default: 128) The larger the value is, the adjustment for background darker the background becomes. (Manual) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 Manual density adjustment for The larger the value is, the darker the text becomes. text (Manual) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment". e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 26 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.5.6 Judgment threshold for ACS The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto Color” is selected at a color mode. The adjustment is available for each of the manually-set original and the original used with the RADF. Code 1675 1676 Item to be adjusted Contents Judgment threshold The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as for ACS when original is set manually black even at the Auto Color Mode. The smaller value is, the more it tends to be judged as color. Judgment threshold for ACS when original Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 70) is set on RADF Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary and make adjustment. Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment". 3.5.7 Sharpness adjustment If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently. Code Color mode Original mode Contents 1737 1738 Full Color Text/Photo Text • The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes. 1739 1740 1741 604 Printed Image Photo Black Map Text/Photo 605 606 1757 • The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear. • The acceptable values are 0 to 31. The center value is 16. However, 0 is equivalent to the center value. Text Photo Auto Color Text/Photo Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. Note: You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness. Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment". November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 27 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.5.8 Setting range correction The values of the background peak/text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density, and the values of the text peak affects that of the text density. Original mode Text/Photo 570 693 Photo 571 694 Text 572 695 Item to be adjusted Remarks Range correction for The following are the default values set original manually set on the original glass for each original mode. Text/Photo: 22, Photo: 12, Text: 22 Range correction for Each digit stands for: One's place: Automatic density mode original set on the RADF Ten's place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: Background peak Text peak 1: 2: fixed varied fixed fixed 3: 4: fixed varied varied varied Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment". e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 28 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.5.9 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) The levels of the background peak for the range correction at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes. Text/Photo 532 Original mode Photo 533 Text 534 Item to be adjusted Remarks Background peak for When the value increases, the back- range correction ground (low density area) of the image is not output. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16, Text: 40) Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment". 3.5.10 Adjustment of smudged/faint text The smudge/faint text at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes. Original mode Text/Photo 648 Item to be adjusted Remarks Adjustment of smudged/ When the value increases, the faint text faint text is improved. When the value decreases, the smudged text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 30) Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. Note: Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value. Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment". November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 29 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.5.11 Adaptation to highlighter Four modes of one touch adjustment are performed and each mode can be switched into two modes; highlighter 1 or 2. This adjustment is performed when the reproduction mode for highlighter is needed. Code One touch adjustment Remarks 1769 Vivid 0: Default (Vivid / Clear / Warm / Cool) 1770 1771 Clear Warm 1: Highlighter 1 2: Highlighter 2 1772 Cool Note: The color may not always be reproduced precisely due to the characteristics of fluorescent ink. 3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting The beam level for 4 divided smoothing is set at the Black Mode. This adjustment enables to adjust the dot size. Code Item to be adjusted Remarks 667-0 667-1 Beam level 0/4 Beam level 1/4 The smaller the value is, the smaller the beam width becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is reproduced 667-2 667-3 Beam level 2/4 Beam level 3/4 accordingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127, 667-4 Beam level 4/4 Level 3/4: 191, Level 4/4: 255) Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Procedure is same as that of “3.5.3 Color balance adjustment”. Notes: 1. When this adjustment is performed, “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Black Mode)” (05-580) needs to be performed since the reproduction of density at Black Mode varies. The result of this adjustment is not reflected to color/black integrated pattern. Namely, each automatic gamma adjustment of Black Mode (05-580) or of Color Mode (05-1643) needs to be performed individually after this adjustment. 2. After this adjustment, set “1” in 08-595 so that the correction result of the Black Mode is not reflected on “Automatic Calibration”. 3. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not increase this order when setting the values. 4. Usually, beam level 4 is most effective on all black modes. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 30 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.5.13 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled. Code Paper type Remarks 1612 1613 Plain paper Thick paper 1 The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of 1614 1615 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 fusing offsetting, etc). Acceptable values : 0 to 255. 1616 OHP film (Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick paper 1: 249, Thick paper 2: 237, Thick paper 3: 237, OHP film: 249) Note: The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs. 3.5.14 Maximum text density adjustment The maximum text density of each color at Full Color Mode can be adjusted as follows. Color Code Item to be adjusted Yellow 1630 Maximum text density Magenta Cyan 1631 1632 Black 1633 Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the maximum text density of each color to be adjusted becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 10 (Default: 5) Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”. Procedure is same as that of “3.5.2 Density adjustment”. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 31 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.5.15 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment Text/Photo reproduction level at the Full color mode, Auto color mode and Gray scale mode can be adjusted. Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment can be switched to "Photo oriented 1", "Photo oriented 2", "Text oriented 1" or "Text oriented 2" in the following codes. Mode Text/Photo 1725 Item to be adjusted Contents Text/Photo 0: Default reproduction level 1: Photo oriented 2 (The printed image reproduction adjustment level higher than that of the Photo oriented 1) 2: Photo oriented 1 (The printed image reproduction level higher than that of the Default) 3: Equivalent to the Default 4: Text oriented 1 (The text reproduction level higher than that of the Default) 5: Text oriented 2 (The text reproduction level higher than that of the Text oriented 1) Notes: • The text reproduction level is lower when the mode is switched from the default value to the Photo oriented 1 or Photo oriented 2. (The text reproduction level in Photo oriented 2 is lower than that in Photo oriented 1.) • Changing the setting value from default value to the Text oriented 1 or Text oriented 2 causes image noise in the printed photo image with few lines per inch. (Photo oriented 2 causes more image noise than Photo oriented 1.) 3.5.16 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode Black reproduction can be switched at the Twin color (Black/Red) copy mode. Mode Twin color copy mode (Black/Red) 1761 Item to be adjusted Contents Black reproduction 0: Default switching 1: Black reproduction oriented Note: The boundary between Red and Black may not be smooth when the setting value is "1". e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 32 04/10 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts replacement. (1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been unpacked or replaced, be sure to make this adjustment: • Laser optical unit • Photoconductive drum • Developer material • Main charger wire • Main charger grid • Transfer belt • 1st transfer roller • Drum cleaning blade • Drum cleaner brush • Image guality sensor (2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a print and check the image to determine if adjustment is necessary: • 2nd transfer roller Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment". Code 1000 1001 Adjustment item Automatic gamma adjustment 1002 1003 Contents (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → Adjustment Mode (2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button to output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”. Pattern No. Language/Resolution Remarks 47 48* PS/600x600dpi PS/1200x600dpi When performing code 1000 When performing code 1001 49 50* PCL/600x600dpi PCL/1200x600dpi When performing code 1002 When performing code 1003 *Perform the adjustment only when the expansion memory has been installed. (3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass, with its side, on which two black squares are present, aligned against the original scale. (4) Key in a code and press the [START] button. → The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.). (5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown. Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected. (To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.) In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown. Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 33 04/05 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode) The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density. Color mode Black Smooth (PS) Language and screen Detail Smooth (PS) (PCL) Detail (PCL) Item to be adjusted Remarks The larger the value is, the 596-0 597-0 598-0 599-0 Low density 596-1 597-1 598-1 599-1 Medium density 596-2 597-2 598-2 599-2 High density density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) [START] button. 0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. → The equipment goes back to the ready state. For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5). Let the equipment restart and perform printing job. If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7). e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 34 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.6.3 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode) The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density. PS PCL Color 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail 1010-0 1014-0 1018-0 1022-0 1026-0 1030-0 1034-0 1038-0 Yellow 1010-1 1014-1 1018-1 1010-2 1014-2 1018-2 1022-1 1022-2 1026-1 1030-1 1026-2 1030-2 1034-1 1034-2 1038-1 1038-2 1011-0 1011-1 1015-0 1019-0 1015-1 1019-1 1023-0 1023-1 1027-0 1031-0 1027-1 1031-1 1035-0 1035-1 1039-0 1039-1 1011-2 1015-2 1019-2 1012-0 1016-0 1020-0 1023-2 1024-0 1027-2 1031-2 1028-0 1032-0 1035-2 1036-0 1039-2 1040-0 1012-1 1016-1 1020-1 1012-2 1016-2 1020-2 1024-1 1024-2 1028-1 1032-1 1028-2 1032-2 1036-1 1036-2 1040-1 1040-2 1013-0 1017-0 1021-0 1013-1 1017-1 1021-1 1025-0 1025-1 1029-0 1033-0 1029-1 1033-1 1037-0 1037-1 1041-0 1041-1 1013-2 1017-2 1021-2 1025-2 1029-2 1033-2 1037-2 1041-2 Magenta Cyan Black Density Remarks Low The larger the Medium value is, the High Low darker the color to be adjusted Medium becomes. Acceptable High Low values: 0 to 255. Medium (Default: 128) High Low Medium High Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”. Procedure is same as that of "3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment". November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 35 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.6.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text The smudged/faint text at the Black Mode is adjusted. Language PS PCL 654 655 Remarks When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value decreases, the faint text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5) (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. → The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (4). (6) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job. (7) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6). 3.6.5 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode The upper limit value is adjusted at the Toner Saving Mode. Black mode PS PCL 664 665 Color mode PS PS PCL PCL 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 1055 1056 1057 1058 Remarks The smaller the value is, the lighter the density of image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 176) Procedure is same as that of “3.6.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text”. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 36 November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3.6.6 Dot size adjustment in black printing The dot size is adjusted in primary scanning direction in black printing. Code Remarks 663 The smaller the value is, the dot size becomes smaller. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 255) Procedure is same as that of “3.6.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text”. 3.6.7 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled. Code Paper type PS 1046-0 PCL 1046-1 Plain paper 1047-0 1048-0 1047-1 1048-1 Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 1049-0 1050-0 1049-1 1050-1 Thick paper 3 OHP film Remarks The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing offsetting, etc). Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick paper 1: 255, Thick paper 2: 255, Thick paper 3: 255, OHP film: 200) Procedure is same as that of “3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment”. Note: The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs. 3.6.8 Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing The state of calibration in color printing mode is initialized at the Setting Mode (08-597). This setting is to be performed when a defect occurs in “Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1000 to 1003)”. The cause of defect is presumed as an image failure (jittering or uneven image density) at the patch chart for gamma adjustment. November 2003 © TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 37 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) 3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment The gamma balance at the Black Mode is adjusted by adjusting the density. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.